FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg.

2018 - 2020

CONTENT

P – VII 1 – 34

 WAVES
&
 SOUND WAVES

P – VIII 35 – 80

 OPTICS & WAVE OPTICS

 DIFFRACTION

 POLARISATION

 OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

P – IX 81 – 166

 ELECTROSTATICS

 CAPACITOR

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

P–X 167 – 218

 CLASSICAL MAGNETISM

 MAGNETISM

 EMI & AC

CENTERS : MUMBAI / DELHI /AKOLA / LUCKNOW / NASHIK / PUNE / NAGPUR / BOKARO / DUBAI
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

WAVES & SOUND WAVES

CONCEPT SUMMARY

1. Mechanical waves can exist in material media and are governed by Newton’s Laws.

2. Transverse waves are waves in which the particles of the medium oscillate perpendicular to the
direction of wave propagation.

3. Longitudinal waves are waves in which the particles of the medium oscillate along, the direction of
wave propagation.

4. Progressive wave is a wave that moves from one point of medium to another.

5. The displacement in a sinusoidal wave propagating in the positive x direction is given by

y  x, t   a sin  kx  t   
Where a is the amplitude of the wave. k is the angular wave number,  is the angular frequency,
 kx  t    is the phase, and  is the phase constant or phase angle.
6. Wavelength  of a progressive wave is the distance between two consecutive points of the same
phase at a given time. In a stationary wave, it is twice the distance between two consecutive nodes or
anti nodes.

7. Period T of oscillation of a wave is defined as the time any element of the medium takes to move
through one complete osculation. It is related to the angular frequency  through the relation
2
T


8. Frequency v of a wave is defined as 1/T and is related to angular frequency by


f=
2

 
9. Speed of a progressive wave is given by v    
k T

10. The speed of a transverse wave on a stretched string is set by the properties of the string. The speed
on a string with tension T and linear mass density  is
T


11. Sound waves are longitudinal mechanical waves that can travel through solids, liquids, or gases. The
speed  of sound wave in a fluid having bulk modulus B and density  is
B


The speed of longitudinal waves in a metallic bar is
Y



CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 1
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

For gases, since B= P , the speed of sound is

P



12. When two or more waves traverse the same medium, the displacement of any element of the medium
is the algebraic sum of the displacements due to each wave. This is known as the principle of
superposition of waves
n
y   f i  x  t 
i 1

13. Two sinusoidal waves on the same string exhibit interference, adding or cancelling according to the
principle of superposition. If the two are travelling in the same direction and have the same
amplitude a and frequency but differ in phase by a phase constant  , the result is a single wave with
the same frequency  :
 1   1 
y  x, t    2a cos  sin  kx  t   
 2   2 
If   0 or an integral multiple of 2 , the waves are exactly in phase and the interference is
constructive; if    , they are exactly out of phase and the interference is destructive.

14. A travelling wave, at a rigid boundary or a closed end, is reflected with a phase reversal but the
reflection at an open boundary takes place without any phase change.
For an incident wave
y1(x, t) = a sin  kt  t 
The reflected wave at a rigid boundary is
yr (x, t) =  a sin  kx  t 
For reflection at an open boundary
yr (x, t)=a sin  kx  t 

15. The interference of two identical waves moving in opposite directions produces standing waves. For
a string with fixed ends, the standing wave is given by
y(x, t)= [2a sin kx] cos t
Standing waves are characterized by fixed locations of zero displacement called nodes and fixed
location of maximum displacements called antinodes. The separation between two consecutive nodes
or antinodes is  /2.
A stretched string of length L fixed at both the ends vibrates with frequencies given by
1 
v , n = 1, 2, 3,….
2 2L
The set of frequencies given by the above relation are called the normal modes of oscillation of the
system. The oscillation mode with lowest frequency is called the fundamental mode or the first
harmonic. The second harmonic is the osculation mode with n = 2 and so on
A pipe of length L with one end closed and other end open (such as air columns) vibrates with
frequencies given by
 1 
v  n   . n = 0, 1, 2, 3,….
 2  2L
The set of frequencies represented by the above relation are the normal modes of oscillation of such
a system. The lowest frequency given by /4L is the fundamental mode or the first harmontic.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 2
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

16. A string of length L fixed at both ends or an air column closed at one end and open at the other end,
vibrates with frequencies called its normal modes. Each of these frequencies is a resonate frequency
of the system.

17. Beats arise when two waves having slightly different frequencies. v1 and v2 and comparable
amplitudes, are superposed. The beat frequency is
vbeat  v1  v2

18. The Doppler effect is a change in the observed frequency of a wave when the source and the
observer O moves relative to the medium. For sound the observed frequency v is given in terms of
the source frequency vo by
   o 
v  vo  
   S 
Here  is the speed of sound through the medium o is the velocity of observer relative to the
medium, and s is the source velocity relative to the medium. In using this formula, velocities in the
direction OS should be treated as positive and those opposite to it should be taken to be negative.

WAVES

FORMULA SUMMARY

Differential equation of any wave is

2y 1  2y 
  
x 2 v 2  t 2 

Equation of plane progressive wave is Y  A sin wt  kx  or y  A sin kx  wt 

These are waves moving in +ve X direction

Y  A sin wt  kx  represents wave moving in – ve X direction
2
K is the wave number
T 2 
K= 
2  v

T
  x
V   wave velocity 
k T t
y
Particle Velocity   A cos(t  kx ) for y  A sin (t  kx )
t

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 3
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 For longitudinal waves like sound

p  p 0 cos(kx  wt )
p  pressure var iation
p 0  Amplitude of pressure var iation

p 0  BkA
A : displacement amplitude
B : bulk modulus of elasticity of medium

Note :- Equation can be written in terms of density as

p 0
   0 cos( kx  wt )  0 
v2

The pressure wave is out of phase by 900 with displacement wave

s = A sin ( kx  wt )

 Velocity Of Wave :
(1) Transverse wave in stretched string
T
V where T : Tension

 : Mass per unit length

(2) Longitudinal wave in solid

Y
V where Y  young ' s Modulus

  density
(3) Longitudinal wave in fluid
B
V where B  Bulk Modulus

  density
For sound propagation in air B=  P (adiabatic)
p RT
V   M = Mean molar mass of air
 M

 Velocity of sound in air increases with humidity since density decreases

 Energy :
1
(i) K.E. per unit volume = P.E. per unit volume =  2 A 2 cos 2 ( kx   t )
2
Average K.E. per unit volume
1
= Average P.E. per unit volume =  2 A 2
4

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 4
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

1
Total energy density =  2 A 2
2
p
Intensity due to point source =
4 r 2
1
p  w 2 A 2 v
2

 Standing Waves :
Y  A sin t  kx  or y  A sin kx  t 
From y = 2A sin t cos kx
Any fixed point on a string is a node of displacement.
Any open end of tube is antinode.

(1) For an open organ pipe open at both ends or a string fixed at both ends
n V
v  V  n=1,2,3
2 

(2) For an organ pipe closed at one end or a string fixed at one end
1
n
v 2 V  V
2 
v = Frequency of wave
V = Velocity of wave
 = Length of string / pipe
n  1 : fundamenta l frequency
Higher value of n give overtones
In the second case, only odd harmonics are present as overtones

Note:
(1) End correction in organ pipe = 0.3d for open end
d: diameter of pipe
(2) Standing wave ratio:
Antinode A i  A r

Node Ai  Ar

 If there is both reflection and transmission at a node,

Ar 
 
v 1  v2
Ai A t 
2v 2
A
v1  v2  v1  v 2  i
 Beat Frequency = f 1  f 2 | Hz
But for human to hear beats
f 1  f 2 |  15 Hz
Waxing decreases Frequency
Filing increases Frequency

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 5
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 Doppler Effect :
 v  v0 
f  f0   Whenever the motion is towards each other freq. increases and vice – versa for eg. If
 v  vs 
objects moving towards source frequency shall increase due to that effect and therefore in the
numerator it will be v + v0 . Similarly if source if moving towards observer. Freq. should increase
and – ve sign will be used in denominator v - vs
When a source is moving towards a reflecting surface with velocity vs , it may be considered to be
equivalent to a source behind the wall moving with a velocity ( - vs)

v0 = Velocity of observer
vs = Velocity of source

Velocity of source to be taken at time of transmission while the velocity of observer is taken at the
time of reception. Velocity component is to be taken along the line joining the point of transmission
& reception, i.e. the initial position of source & the final position of observer .

 Loudness of sound :
 I 
B  10 log  I 0  10 12 W / m 2
 I0 
It is measured in decibels (dB)

y
Note : In general, for any wave y   ,  x , t  , Velocity 
t
2
 y  1  y 
Pressure variation, p   B  ,Kinetic energy density, Wk =   
 x  2  t 
2
1  y 
Potential energy density, Wp = B 
2  x 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 6
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Sound wave is travelling along positive x-direction Displacement (y) of particles at any time t is
as shown in figure. Select the wrong statement:
y

C D E
A X
B

(a) Particle located at E has its velocity in negative x-direction

(b) Particle located at D has zero velocity
(b) Particles located between B and C are under compression
(d) None of the above

2. An open organ pipe of length l is sounded together with another organ pipe of length l + x in
their fundamental tones (x << l). The beat frequency heard will be (speed of sound is v) :
vx vl 2 vx vx 2
(a) 2 (b) (b) 2 (d)
4l 2x 2l 2l

3. A receiving station on the ground is receiving a signal of frequency 5 MHz from a transmitter at a
height of 300m above the surface of the earth (of radius 6.4 106 m ) at a distance of 100km from the
receiver. Then the signal is coming via
(a) ground wave propagation
(b) sky wave propagation
(b) both ground wave and sky wave propagation
(d) neither ground wave nor sky wave propagation

4. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by 75.0cm. It is observed to have resonant
frequencies of 420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other resonant frequencies between these two. Then,
the lowest resonant frequency for this string is
(a) 1050 Hz (b) 10.5 Hz (b) 105 Hz (d) 1.05 Hz

5. A wave represented by the equation y  a cos  kx  t  is superposed with another wave to form a
stationary wave such that the point x  0 is a node. The equation for the other wave is
(a) a sin  kx  t  (b) a cos  kx  t  (c) a cos  kx  t  (d) a sin  kx  t 

6. In a sonometer wire, the tension is maintained by suspending a 50.7-kg mass from the free end of the
Wire. The suspended mass has a volume of 0.0075 m3 . The fundamental frequency of the wire is
260 Hz. If the suspended mass is completely submerged in water, the fundamental frequency will
become
(a) 200 Hz (b) 220 Hz (c) 230 Hz (d) 240 Hz

7. A string A has double the length, double the tension, double the diameter and double the density as
another string B. Their fundamental frequencies of vibration are n A and n B respectively .The ratio
n A n B equal to
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 (c) 2 (d) 4
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 7
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. A cylindrical resonance tube, open at both ends, has a fundamental frequency F in air. Half of the
length of the tube is dipped vertically in water. The fundamental frequency of the air column now is
(a) 4 F (b) 2F (c) F (d) F 2

9. A pipe of length 1 m is closed at one end. The velocity of sound in air is 300 m s . The air column in
the pipe will not resonante for sound of frequency
(a) 75 Hz (b) 225 Hz (c) 300 Hz (d) 375 Hz

10. An organ pipe filled with a gas at 27 C resonates at 400 Hz in its fundamental mode. If it is filled
with the same gas at 90 C , the resonance frequency will be
(a) 420 Hz (b) 440 Hz (c) 484 Hz (d) 512 Hz

11. A source of sound is in the shape of a long narrow cylinder radiating sound waves normal to the axis
of the cylinder. Two points P and Q are at perpendicular distances of 9 m and 25 m from the axis.
The ratio of the amplitudes of the waves at P and Q is
(a) 5 : 3 (b)  5:  3 (c) 3:5 (d) 25: 9

12. Two sources of sound of the same frequency produce sound intensities I and 4 I at a point P when
used individually. If they are used together such that the sounds from them reach P with a phase
difference of 2  3 , the intensity at P will be
(a) 2 I (b) 3 I (c) 4 I (d) 5 I

13. The frequency changes by 10% as a sound source approaches a stationary observer with constant
speed VS . What would be the percentage change in frequency as the source recedes the observer
with the same speed .Given that VS  Va (Va = speed of sound in air)
(a) 14.3% (b)20% (c) 10.0% (d)8.5%

 20 
14. A standing wave y  Asin   x  cos 1000 t  is maintained in a taut string where y and x are
 3 
expressed in meters. The distance between the successive points oscillating with the amplitude A 2
across a node is equal to
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 25 cm (c) 5 cm (d) 10 cm

15. An isotropic point source emits sound of a single frequency. The amplitude of the sound wave at a
distance r from the source is proportional to r n . The value of n is
(a) 2 (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 1 2

16. An engine whistling at a constant frequency n0 and moving with a constant velocity goes past a
stationary observer. As the engine crosses him, the frequency of the sound heard by him changes by
a factor f. The actual differences in the frequencies of the sound heard by him before and after the
engine crosses him is
1 1 1 f 2   1 f  1  1 f 
(a) n 0 1  f 2  (b) n 0   (c) n 0   (d) n 0  
2 2  f  1 f  2  1 f 

17. A closed organ pipe of length 1.2 m vibrates in its first overtone mode. The pressure variation is
maximum at:
(a) 0.8 m from the open end (b) 0.4 m from the open end
(c) at the open end (d) 1.0 m from the open end
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 8
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 
18. The equation of a wave disturbance is given as: y  0.02 cos   50   cos 10x  , where x and y
2 
are in meters and t in seconds. Choose the wrong statement:
(a) Antinode occurs at x  0.3m (b) The wavelength is 0.2 m
(c) The speed of the constituent waves is 4 m s (d) Node occurs at x  0.15 m

19. The speed of sound in a gas, in which two waves of wavelength 1.0 m and 1.02 m produce 6 beats
per second, is approximately:
(a) 350 m s (b) 300 m s (c) 380 m s (d) 410 m s

20. An observer starts moving with uniform acceleration ‘a’ towards a stationary sound source of
frequency f. As the observer approaches the source, the apparent frequency f’ heard by the observer
varies with time t as:
f' f'

t t
(a) (b)
f' f'

t t
(c) (d)

21. A uniform rope having mass m hangs vertically from a rigid support. A transverse wave pulse in
created at the lower end. The speed u of wave pulse varies with height h from the lower end as?
(a) u (b) u

u u

(c) (d)

h h

22. A loop of a string of mass per unit length  and radius R is rotated about an angle passing through
centre perpendicular to the plane with an angular velocity  . A small disturbance is created in the
loop having the same sense of rotation. The linear speed of the disturbance for a stationary observer
is
(a)  R (b) 2  R (c) 3 R (d) zero

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 9
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

23. In a stationary wave that forms as a result of reflection of waves from an obstacle the ratio of the
amplitudes at an antinnode to the amplitude at node is n . The fraction of energy reflected is
2 2 2 2
 n 1   n 1  1  n 
(a)   (b)   (c)   (d)  
 n   n 1  n  n 1 

24. A string of length  is fixed at both ends. H is vibrating in its 3rd overtone with maximum amplitude

a. The amplitude at a distance from one end is
3
a 3
(a) a (b) 0 (c) (d) a
2 2

25. Two identical pulses moves in opposite directions with same uniform speeds on a stretched string.
The width and kinetic energy of each pulse is L and K respectively. At the instant they completely
overlap, the kinetic energy of the width L of the string where they overlap is
K
L
L

K
(a) K (b) 2K (c) 4K (d) 8 K

26. A wire of length  having tension T and radius r vibrates with fundamental frequency f. Another
wire of the same metal with length 2 having tension 2T and radius 2 r will vibrate with
fundamental frequency
f f
(a) f (b) 2f (c) (d)
2 2 2

27. Two particles of medium disturbed by the wave propagation are at x1  0 and x 2  1 cm . The
respectively displacements  in cm  of the particles can be given by the equation
 
y1  2sin 3t y2  2sin  3t  
 8
The wave velocity is
(a) 16 cm sec (b) 24 cm sec (c) 12 cm sec (d) 8 cm sec

28. Equation of a stationary and travelling waves are as follows y1  a sin kx cos t , and
 3
y2  a sin  t  kx  . The phase difference between two points x1  and x 2  is 1 in the
3k 2k
standing wave  y1 and is 2 in travelling wave  y2  then ratio 1 2 is
(a) 6 7 (b) 1 (c) 5 6 (d) none

29. At t  0 , a transverse wave pulse travelling in the positive x direction with a speed of 2 m s in a
6
wire in described by the function y  given that x  0 . Transverse velocity of a particle at
x 2
x  2m and t  2 second is
(a) 3m s (b)  3 m s (c) 8m s (d)  8 m s

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 10
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

30. A cord attached about an end to a vibrating fork divides it into 6 loops, when its tension is 36 N, they
tension at which it will vibrate in 4 loops is
(a) 24 N (b) 36 N (c) 64 N (d) 81N

31. A travelling wave is given by

0.8
y
3x  12xt  12t 2  1
2
Where x and y are is m and t is in sec, then velocity and amplitude at wave will be
(a) 2 m s , 0.2 m (b) 4 m s , 0.2 m (c) 2 m s , 0.4m (d) none

32. A 75 cm string fixed at both ends produces resonant frequencies 384 Hz and 288Hz without there
being any other resonant frequency between these two, wave speed of the string is
(a) 144 m s (b) 216 m s (c) 108m s (d) 72 m s

33. The fundamental frequency of a sonometer wire of length  is f0. A bridge is now introduced at a
distance of  r from center of the wire      . The number of beats heard if both sides of the
bridges are set into vibration in their fundamental modes are
8f  f  2f  4f 
(a) 0 (b) 0 (c) 0 (d) 0
   
34. A stretched rope having linear mass density 5 102 kg m in under a tension of 80 N . The power
that has to be supplied to the rope to generate harmonic waves at a frequency of 60 Hz and an
2 2
amplitude of m is
15
(a) 215 (b) 251 (c) 512 (d) 521

35. A string of length 1.5m with its two ends clamped in vibrating in fundamental mode. Amplitude at
the center of the string is 4 mm . Distance between the two points having amplitude 2mm is
(a) 1m (b) 75cm (c) 60 cm (d) 50cm

36. A closed organ pipe has length  . The air in it is vibrating in 3 rd overtone with maximum amplitude

a . The amplitude at a distance of from closed end of pipe is equal to
7
a 3
(a) a (b) (c) a (d) none
2 2
u
37. A wall is moving with velocity u and a source of sound moves with velocity is the same direction
2
as shown in figure. Assuming sound is travelling with 10 u velocity. The ratio of incident sound
wavelength on the wall to the reflected sound wavelength by the wall is equal to

u 2 u

S
(a) 9:11 (b) 11:9 (c) 4:5 (d) 5:4

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 11
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

38. S1 and S2 are two coherent sources of sound having no initial phase difference. The velocity of
sound is 330 m s . No minima will be formed on line passing through S2 and perpendicular to the
line joining S1 and S2 if the frequency of both the sources is
S1

3m

S2
(a) 50Hz (b) 60 Hz (c) 70 Hz (d) 80 Hz

39. A point source is emitting sound is all directions. The ratio of distance of two points from the point
source where the difference is loudness levels is 3dB is
1 1 1 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 2 4 3

40. x  x1  x 2 (where x1  4cos t, x 2  3 sin t ) is the equation of motion of a particle along x axis.
The phase difference between x1 and x is

(a) 37 (b) 53 (c) 90 (d) none

41. Three successive resonant frequencies in a closed organ pipe are 825 Hz, 1155 Hz and 1485 Hz. If
speed of sound in air is 330 m/s then the wrong statement is:
(a) Fundamental frequency of the pipe is 165 Hz (b) Length of the pipe is 0.5 m
(c) Frequency of first overtone is 495 Hz (d) Frequency of first harmonic is 330 Hz

42. Two submarines A and B are moving towards each other with equal speeds v0. A produces a sound
signal of frequency 4900 Hz and records apparent frequency of the reflected signal from B equal to
6400 Hz. If speed of sound in water is 1500 m/s then v0 is
(a) 1312.5 m/s (b) nearly 200 m/s (c) 100 m/s (d) nearly 50 m/s

43. Two plane harmonic waves y1 = A cos(ax + bt) and y2 = 0.4 A sin (ax  bt) are superimposed. The
maximum velocity of any particle in medium will be
(a) 1.4 Ab (b) 0.6 Ab (c) 0.2 Ab (d) 2.8 Ab

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. In a resonance-column experiment, a long tube, open at the top, is clamped vertically. By a separate
device, water level inside the tube can be moved up or down. The section of the tube from the open
end to the water level acts as a closed organ pipe. A vibrating tuning fork is held above the open end,
and the water level is gradually pushed down. The first and the second resonances occur when the
water level is 24.1 cm and 74.1 cm respectively below the open end. The diameter of the tube is
(a) 2cm (b) 3cm (c) 4 cm (d) 5cm

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 12
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

2. In a mixture of gases, the average number of degrees of freedom per molecule is 6. The rms speed of
the molecules of the gas is c. The velocity of sound in the gas is
(a) c  2 (b) 3c 4 (c) 2c 3 (d) c  3

3. The velocity of sound in dry air is Vd , and in moist air it is Vm . The velocities are measured under the
same conditions of temperature and pressure. Which of the following statements is fully correct?
(a) Vd  Vm because dry air has lower density than moist air.
(b) Vd  Vm because moist air has lower density than dry air.
(c) Vd  Vm because the bulk modulus of dry air is greater than that of moist air.
(d) Vd  Vm because the bulk modulus of moist air is greater than that of dry air.

4. The vibration of a string fixed at both ends are described by Y  2sin  x  sin 100t  where Y is in
mm x , is in cm t, in sec then
(a) Maximum displacement of the particle at x  1 6 cm would be 1 mm
(b) velocity of the particle at x  1 6cm at time t  1 600sec will be 157   mm s
(c) If the length of the string be 10 cm, number of loop in it would be 5
(d) None of these

5. A wire under tension between two fixed points A and B, executes transverse vibrations in lowest
mode so that the mid point O of AB is a node. Then
(a) all points of the wire between A and B are in the same phase
(b) all points between A and O are in the same phase
(c) any point between A and O and any point between O and B have a phase difference of  2
(d) any point between A and O and any point between O and B have a phase difference of .

6. A wave equation is given as v  cos  500t  70x  , where y is in mm, x in m adn t is in sec.
(a) the wave must be a transverse propagating wave.
(b) The speed of the wave is 50/7 m/s
(c) The frequency of oscillations 1000  Hz
(d) Two closest points which are in same phase have separation 20  7 cm .

7. Which of the following statements are wrong about the velocity of sound in air:
(a) decreases with increases in temperature (b) increases with decrease in temperature
(c) decreases as humidity increases (b) independent of density of air.

8. A clamped string is oscillating in nth harmonic, then

(a) total energy of oscillations will be n2 times that of fundamental frequency
2
(b) total energy of oscillations will be  n  1 times that of fundamental frequency
(c) average kinetic energy of the string over a complete oscillations is half of that of the total energy
of the string.
(d) none of these
9. In a resonance tube experiment, a closed organ pipe of length 120 cm resonates when tuned with a
tuning fork of frequency 340Hz . If water is poured in the pipe then  given vair  340 m s 
(a) minimum length of water column to have the resonance is 45 cm
(b) the distance between two successive nodes is 50 cm
(c) Maximum length of water column to create the resonance in 95 cm
(d) none of these
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 13
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

10. A wire, under tension between two fixed points A and B, executes transverse vibration so that the
midpoint O of AB is a node. Then
A B

(a) All points of wire between A and B same phase

(b) All points of wire between A and O are in same phase

(c) A point between A and O and a point between O and B may have a phase difference of .
2
(d) A point between A and O and a point between O and B may have a phase difference of  .

11. For a certain transverse standing wave on a long string, an antinode is formed at x  0 and next to it,
a node is formed at x  0.10 , the displacement y  t  of the string particle at x  0 is shown in
figure.
y  cm 

0.05
0 t s
0.1 0.15 0.2
4

(a) Transverse displacement of the particle at x  0.05 m and t  0.05sec is 2 2 cm

(b) Transverse displacement of the particle at x  0.04 m and t  0.025sec is 2 2 cm
(c) Speed of travelling wave that interfere to produce this standing wave is 2 m s
1
(d) The transverse velocity of the string particle at x  m and b  0.1sec is 20 cm sec
15
12. In a standing wave on a string:
(a) In one time period all the particles are simultaneously at test twice.
(b) All the particles must be at their positive extremes simultaneously once is one time period
(c) All the particle may be as their positive extremes simultaneously once in a time period
(d) All the particle are never at rest simultaneously .

13. There are three strings RP,PQ,QS as shown. Their mass and lengths are RP   0.1kg, 2m  ,
PQ   0.2 kg,3m  , QS   0.15kg, 4m  respectively. All the strings are under same tension. Wave-1
is incident at P. It is partly reflected (Wave-2) and partly transmitted (wave-3). Now wave-3 is
incident at O . It is again partly transmitted (wave-5) and partly reflected (wave-4). Phase difference
between wave-1 and wave:
1 3 5

R S
P O

2 4

(a) 2 is  (b) 4 is zero (c) 2 is zero (d) 4 is 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 14
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

14. A string of mass m is fixed at both of its ends. The fundamental mode of string is excited and it has
an angular frequency  and maximum displacement amplitude A. then’
1 2 2
(a) The maximum kinetic energy of the string is Ek  mA 
4
1 2 2
(b) The maximum kinetic energy of the string is Ek  m  A
2
1 2 2
(c) The mean kinetic energy of the string averaged over tone periodic time is  EK  m  A
4
1 2 2
(d) The mean kinetic energy of the string averaged over, one periodic time is  Ek  mA 
8

15. A stationary observer receives a sound of frequency f 0  2000 Hz . The apparent frequency f varies
with time as shown in figure speed of sound  300 m s . Choose the correct alternative(s)”
f  Hz 

fm

2000

1800

f  sec 
(a) speed of source is 66.7 m s
(b) Fm shown in figure cannot be greater than 2500 Hz
(c) Speed of source is 33.33 m s
(d) Fm shown in figure cannot be greater than 2250 Hz

16. The figure represent a longitudinal wave travelling in positive x  direction, then
E
A

x
B D

C
(a) Part ABC represents compression (b) Part ABC represents rarefaction
(c) Part CDE represents compression (d) Part CDE represents raregfaction

17. Plane harmonic waves of frequency 500 Hz are produced in air with displacement amplitude of

10 m . Given that density of air is 1.29 kg m 3 and speed of sound in air is 340 m s . Then

(a) The pressure amplitude is 13.8 N m 2 (b) The energy density is 6.4 104 J m3

(c) The energy flux is 0.22J m2s  (d) none

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 15
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

INTEGER TYPE

1. A train is moving at a constant speed of 120km/hr on a straight track. An observer is standing at a

distance of 400m from the track. The train is sounding a whistle at a frequency of 640 Hz. Plot the
variation of the apparent frequency to the observer with time. Assume that train is at a large distance
from the observer at t = 0.

2. One cubic metre of water is taken in a strong cylinder and the pressure on it is increased from one
atmosphere 105 Newton m 2  to two atmosphere. The volume of water, on increasing the pressure,
reduces to 950 cc. What is the velocity of sound in water?

3. A source of sound emitting a frequency of 200Hz is dropped from a height. During its fall under
gravity it crosses a balloon moving with a constant velocity of 2m/s (upwards), one second after it
started to fall. The observer in the balloon hears 12 beats at the moment the source crosses the
balloon. Velocity of sound in air at 0 C is 320 m/s. This phenomena can be observed at poles or at
equator?
[Take g = 10m s2 to be uniform on earth’s surface]

4. At the ends A and B of a long stretched string, two identical triangular pulse are generated which
travel towards each other. At t = 0, the snapshot of the string is shown in figure. The tension in the
string is 2.5N and the linear mass density of the string is 1.0 gm/cm. Draw the shape of the
string at times (i)t= 1 sec (ii)t= 1.01 sec (iii) t6 = 1.02 sec and (iv) t 1.11 sec.

5. A 3m long organ pipe open at both ends is driven to third harmonic standing wave. If the amplitude
of pressure oscillations is 1 percent of mean atmospheric pressure  P0  105 N m 2  . Find the
amplitude of particle displacement and density oscillations. Speed of sound V  332 m s and density
of air   1.03kg m3 .
t=0
B
A

10 cm
5cm 5cm

6. A plane longitudinal wave of angular frequency 1000 sec1 is travelling along positive x-direction in
a homogenous gaseous medium of density   1 kg m 3 . Intensity of the wave is 1  10 10 Wm 2 and
maximum pressure change is  P  m  2  10 4 Nm 2 . Assuming at x = 0, initial phase of medium
particles to be zero, calculate equation of the wave.

7. A plane wave propagates along positive x-direction in a homogenous medium of density

  200 kg m  3 . Due to propagation if the wave medium particles oscillate. Space density of this
oscillation energy is E  0.16  2 J / m 3 and maximum shear strain produced in the medium is
0  8105. If at an instant phase difference between two particles located at points (1m, 1m, 1m)
and (2m, 2m, 2m) is   144o , assuming at t = 0phase of particles at x = 0 to be zero,
(i) calculate equation of the wave and
(ii) state whether the wave is longitudinal or transverse.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 16
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. One end of a thin, long uniform string having linear mass density  is fixed to a wall and other end
with a block which can move along a vertical rail. The string is horizontal and has a tension F. If
block starts to execute SHM along the rail with amplitude a and angular frequency  , calculate
(i) energy transferred to string during one complete oscillation of the block and
(ii) maximum rate of transfer of energy to the string.

9. Three plane sources of sound of frequency n 1  400 Hz, n 2  401 Hz and n 3  402 Hz of equal
amplitude a each, are sounded together. A detector receives, waves from all the three sources
simultaneously. It can detect signals of amplitude  a . Calculate
(i) period of one complete cycle of intensity received by the detector and
(ii) time for which the detector remains ideal in each cycle of intercity

10. Two trains A and B simultaneously start moving along parallel tracks from a station along same
direction. A starts with constant acceleration 2ms 1 from rest, which B with the same acceleration
but with initial velocity of 40 ms1 . 20 second after start, passenger of a hears whistle of B. If

frequency of whistle is1194 Hz and velocity of sound in air is 322 ms 1 , calculate frequency
observed by the passenger.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 17
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ANSWER KEY
SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (c)

6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (b)

11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c)

16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (a)

21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (c)

26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (d)

31. (a) 32. (a) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (a)

36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (a)

41. (d) 42. (c) 23. (a)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a,b) 5. (b,d)

6. (a,b,d) 7. (a,b,c,d) 8. (a,c) 9. (a,b,c) 10. (b,d)

11. (a,c,d) 12. (a,c) 13. (a,b) 14. (a,d) 15. (c,d)

16. (a,d) 17. (a,b,c)

INTEGER

1. (640 Hz) 2. 14m sec 3.  33 C  4. 1.11sec 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 18
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

WAVES & SOUND WAVES

(SOLUTION)

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Velocity of particle is given by
 dy 
vp   v  
 dx 

dy
Here, v is wave speed and the slope.
dx
Hence, v P  – slope
At point E, slope is positive, thereforce, v P will be in negative x-direction. Similarly,
slope at D is zero or v P at D is zero.
dy
Excess pressure P = – B .
dx
(B = bulk modulus)
In the region between B and C, slope is negative. Therefore, P is positive. Hence,
particle lying between B and C are in compression.

2. Beat frequency = f 1 – f 2
v v
 
2l 2l  2x
1
v   x  
 1  1   
2l   l  
v x
 1  1  
2l  l
vx
 2
2l

3. For ground wave propagation, the maximum range is

d max  2Rh  2  6.4 106  300
 62 103 m  62km
Which is less than 100km. Hence choice (a) is wrong. The maximum frequency which can be
propagated via sky wave is
v max  9MHz
Which is more than 5 MHz. Hence a 5 MHz signal can be propagated via sky waves and not via
ground waves. Thus the correct choice is (b)

4. Let vm  420Hz be the mth harmonic and vn  315Hz be the nth harmonic. Then
m T
420  (1)
2L 
n T
and 315  (2)
2L 
where  is the mass per unit length of the string.
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 19
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Dividing (1) and (2), we have

420 m 4 m
 or 
315 n 3 n
Hence the lowest values of m and n are m  4 and n  3 , i.e., 420 Hz is the 4 th harmonic and 315Hz
is the 3rd harmonic.
4 T 1 T 420
 420  or   105
2L  2L  4
Now, the lowest resonant frequency is the fundamental frequency, which is given gy
1 T
v1   105Hz
2L 
5. (c)
y  a  cos kx cos t  sin kx sin t  is given
As y  0 at x  0 for all values of t (node), the cos kx term must vanish in the sum of the two waves

6. (d)
1 T1
Initially, 260  , T1  50.7 g  507 N
2l m
When the mass is submerged , upthrust
  0.0075m 3 103 kg m3 10 m s 2 
 75 N
New tension  T2   507  75 N  432 N
1 T2
n
2l m
n T 432 144 12
or  2   
260 T1 507 169 13
or n  240 Hz

7. (a) 8. (c)

9. (c)
The tube will resonate for l =  2N  1  , N  0,1, 2,.....
4
V V  2N  1 300  2N  1
Frequency  n     75  2N  1
 4l 4 1

10. (b)
n  V and V   
Here, n1  400Hz T1  273  27 T2  273  90
n2 363
  1.21  1.1
n1 300

11. (a)
1 2
For a cylindrical source, intensity    amplitude 
dis tan ce

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 20
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (b)

17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (a)

21. (d)
T
u

 = mass per unit length
T = Tension T(k) T  x   xg
g x
u  xg

 u 2  xg

22. (b)
d
2T sin  dm w 2 R
2
 d 
2T    R d w 2 R
 2 
T
 w 2R 2 d d
 2 2
d d
T T 2 2 T
  wR

T
 Vpulsestring  Vpulse  Vstring  wR  VP  VS

 VP  wR  vS  wR  wR  2wR

23. (b)
Ai  Ar
 n given
Ai  Ar
Ai  n  1 
Comp divides  
Ar  n  1 
Ar 2 2
 n 1 
Fraction of energy reflected   
Ai 2  n 1 
24. (d)
l  2

l

l 2

A  x   A sin kx

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 21
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 2    2   4  3A
 A sin    A sin   2    A sin     magnitude 
  3   3  3  2

25. (c)
1 1 1 
mv 2  k , m  2v 2  4  mv2   4k
2 2 2 

26. (c)
1 T m r 2 s
f   r 2s
2e  e 
12 12
1  T  1  2T 
f   then f'  
2e  r 2s  4c  4r 2s 
f
2 2
f'
f
 f'
2 2

27. (b)
2 2
w  3   T  sec
T 3
y  A sin  wt  kx 
 2 
kx   
8  8
  16
 16
v   24 cm sec
T 23
28. (a)
 3   9  2 7
x 2  x1      
 2k 3k  6k 6k
7 d 7 
k  
62  12
2  7  7
2   1  
 12 6
6
Ratio 
7
29. (b)
6 6
y  x, t  0   , y  x, t  
2 x  2t 2
K  
y 24 24
   3m s
t  x  2t 3 3
 2  4

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 22
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

30. (d)
'
6 loops 6      3
2


3
T F
v  f   …..(1)
 3
'
4 loops  4      2 '
2

'
2
v '  f '

T '  f ……(2)
2
12
T 2 6 2
½     
 T' 3 'T '1 2 3
T '  81N
31. (a)
0.8
y
3 x  2t 2  4
 
v  2m s
A  0.2 m
32. (a)
f3 288 3 3 3 3
  for 288Hz :   
f 4 384 4 2 4 2
Wave speed  v   f  1 2m
288
  144 m s
2

33. (a)
v
f0  Beat frequency  f1  f 2
2
v v f 
   0
    
2     2    
2  2 

34. (c)
1 T
P  v A 2 2 v
2 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 23
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

35. (a)
 3
   3m
2 2

x=0
2mm 4mm 2mm

1
A cos  A sin kx  2  4sin kx  sin kx 
2
 5
kx1  , kx 2 
6 6
5  4 4  
So, x 2  x1      x 2  x1  1m
6x 6x 6x 6  2 3

36. (a)

l

4

d  
  
4 4 7

as at from closed and antinode is formed so, amplitude  a
7

37. (a)
Vsound,observe  fappear apparent
f
 10u  u  18f
For incident wave: f appear    
 10u  u 2  19
vsound , observe  fappapp
18f 19u
10u  u   ; i 
19 2f
For reflected wave:
 10u  28f   10  18 
fapp         f
 10u  a  19   11  19 
vsound,observer  fappapp
 10  18f 
10u     r
 11  19 
11 19u
r 
18f
19u 18f 9
Ratio 
2f 11194 11
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 24
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

38. (a)
Maximum path difference  3m

For minima x   2n  1
2
if x min imum  3 then no minima will formed

3   6 V  f
2
v v 330
 6   F  F  55Hz
f f 6

39. (b)
 I 
Loudness  10 log  
 I0 
I  I 
L1  10 log  1  , L 2  10 log  2 
 I0   I0 
I  I 
L 2  L1  10 log  2   3  10 log  2 
 I1   I1 
2
I  I I 2  r1  r 1
 0.3  log  2   log 2  log 2 2    2 
 I1  I1 I1  r2  r1 2

40. (a)
x  x1  x 2  4 cos t  3sin t
4 3 
 5  cos t  sin t   5  cos t sin   cossin t 
5 5 
x  5sin  t    or x  5cos  t    x1  4 cos t
3
Phase difference    sin 1    37
5

41. (d)
825 = 165x5, 1155 = 165x7 and 1485 = 165x9
Therefore 825 Hz is 5 th harmonic and fundamental frequency of the pipe is, n0 = 165 Hz.
First overtone will be n1 = 3n0 = 495 Hz and first harmonic will be n0 = 165 Hz

42. (c)
 v  v0 
Apparent frequency received by B will be n1  n  
 v  v0 
Now B will be treated like a source of frequency n1.
2
 v  v0   v  v0 
Apparent frequency of reflected wave received by A will be n '  n1    n 
 v  v0   v  v0 
Put n’ = 6400 Hz, n = 4900 Hz and v = 1500 m/s

43. (a)
vmax = Amax.  = (1.4) A.b

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 25
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (b)
Let d  the diameter of the tube
 4  24.1  0.3d , and
3 4  74.1  0.3d
or  2  50 cm or   100cm
 0.3    4  24.1 cm   25  24.1 cm  0.9 cm
or d  3cm

2. (c)
  1 2 f  1 2 6  4 3
c  3p  and    

   3 4 92 3
c

3. (b) 4. (a,b) 5. (b,d) 6. (a,b,d) 7. (a,b,c,d)

8. (a,c)

9. (a,b,c)
V  f  340  340 
   1m

 x x  25 cm
4
Max  120  25
Max  95 cm
3
y  75 cm
4
MIN  120  75  45 cm

 distance between nodes  50 cm
2

10. (b,d)

In standing wave particles may have a phase difference of O or 

11. (a,c d)
y  x, t    cos kx sin t
 2   2 
y  0.05, 0.05  4cos  0.05  sin  0.005 
 0.4   0.2 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 26
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 
 4 cos   sin    2 2cm
4 2
0.4
v  f   2m s
0.2
y
 ~ A  cos  kx  cos  t 
t
 2   2 1   2 
~ 4   cos   cos  0.1
 0.2   0.4 15   0.2 
y
 20 cm sec  particle velocity
t

12. (ac)

13. (a,b)
1 2 3
R v1 P v2 Q v3 S

T
v1   20T
0.1 2
T
v2   15T
0.2 3
T 80T
v3  
0.15 4 3
For RP and PQ v1  v2
So, reflection is from denser medium so phase difference between 1 & 2 is 
  
R    P  Q v3 S

So  AB

14. (a,d)

1
K max imum    dx 2  A sin kx 2
2
0
1
 E K  m2 A 2
4
E 1
also  E K  K  m2 A 2
2 8

15. (d)
 v  v0 
Fappear   f
 v  vs 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 27
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 300 
1800    2000
 300  vs 
1000
300  vs 
3
100
 vs   33.33 m s
3
 v 
Fmax imum    2000
 v  vs 
 300  20000
  2000   2250 Hz
 276  9

16. (a,d)
ABC has negative slope, hence represent compression while CDE has positive slope has represented
rare fraction

17. (a,b,c)
B
  P m  BAK v B  v 2

 v 2 AK
2 2
 = v2A  v 2 A  vA2f
 vf
 P m  2 Af v  13.8 N m 2
Energy density  2 2 A 2f 2
 6.4  10 4 J m 3
Energy flux  2 2 4 2 f 2 v
 0.22 J  m2 s 
INTEGER TYPE

1. (640 Hz)
u  120 km hr
S u P Q
100
 ms 
3
400 m
When train is at S (as shown) apparent frequency is
v
v'   for region SP  O
v  u cos 
v v'
and v '  v  for region PQ 
v  cos  709.5

 v ' is maximum when cos   1 i.e in SP region  640

582.9

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 28
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

v 340
 V 'max  v  640   709.5 Hz
vu 100
340 
3
And v ' is minimum in segment PQ when cos   1
340
v 'min  640   582.9 Hz
100
340 
3
And when the train is at P
v '  v  640 Hz
 graph is as shown below

2. 14m sec 
Change in volume , v  50 106 m3
v 50  106
volume strain    50  106
v 1
Stress = increase in pressure  105 N m2
stress 105
Bulk modulus, E  
strain 50 106
density of water, d  1000kg m3
E
 velocity of sound v 
D
2 109
  14 m sec
103

3.  33 C 


 v2 
Before crossing n '  200  
 v  10 
 v2 
After crossing n "  200  n
 v  10 
Given n ' n "  12
 v2 v2 
   200  12
 v  10 v  10 
Solving v  300 m sec
Now speed of sound  T
300 T
 
320 23
 0.878  273  T
 T  239.8K
 33 C
This temperature can be observed at poles.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 29
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

4. 1.11sec 
T 2.5N
Velocity wave v    5m s
 0.1kg m

A B t  1sec

t  1.01sec

t  1.02sec
1m
t=1.11 sec

5.
  3m
Third harmonic means
 2
3   or    2m
2 3
2v 2  332
Angular frequency   2 n  
 2
 332  rad sec
The particle displacement is y  Acos kx.sin t
2 2 3 3y
k   and   kv 
 2 3  
 3x   3v 
 y  A cos   sin  t
     
The longitudinal oscillation of air column can be viewed as oscillations of particle displacement or
pressure wave or density wave. Pressure variation is related to particle displacement as
dy
P  x   B  B = Bulk modulus 
dx
 3BA   3x   3v 
  sin   sin  t
        
Amplitude of pressure variation is
3BA B
Pmax  v ; or B  v 2
 
3Pv2 A P 
 Pmax  or, A  max2
 2v 
3 2
Here Pmax  1% of P0  10 N m
103  3
A 2
 0.0028 m  0.28cm
3  1.03   332  
dp m
Now B  Volume V 
 dv v  
m vd dv d
dv   2
d   
  v 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 30
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Substituting in (1)
d
d  
B
 P   1
 d Pmax  Pmax  max
B v2  B  v 2 
103
 2
 9  10 3 kg m3
 332 

6. Let displacement amplitude of medium particles be a and velocity of wave propagation be v.

1 2
Then intensity, I  22 n 2a 2v   2n  a 2v
2
But 2  n   (angular frequency)
21
 a2v  or a 2 v  2kt10 16 …(1)
2
P
Velocity of longitudinal waves in a gas, v 

 P  v2 …(2)
Due to propagation of longitudinal waves, maximum pressure change in the medium is given by
P a
 P max 
v
Substituting P  v2 ,   P  max  v a
 P max
Or av   2 107 …(3)

Solving equation (1)and (3), a  109 m and v  200ms1 .
Since, initial phase of particles at x = 0 is zero, therefore, equation of the plane travelling
wave is given by
 x
  a sin   t  
 v
9
   10 sin 1000t  5x  m

7. Since, the wave is a plane travelling wave, therefore, intensity at every point will be the same.
Since, initial phase of particles at x = 0 is zero and the wave is travelling along positive x-
direction, therefore, equation of the wave will be of the form
 x
  a sin   t   …(1)
 v
Let intensity of the wave be I, then space density of oscillation energy of medium particles will be
I
equal to E  .
v
But I  22 n 2a 2v , therefore, E  22 n 2 a 2  0.162Jm3
Or a 2 n 2  4 104 or an  0.02 …(2)
d
Shear strain of the medium is   .
dx

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 31
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

a  x
Differentiating equation (1),  .cos   t  
v  v
 x
Modulus of shear stain  will be maximum when cos   t    1
 v
a
 Maximum shear strain 0  , but it is equal to 8105
v
a 5
  810 where   2n
v
 an  4v 105 ...(3)
1
Solving equations (2) and (3), v = 500 ms
Since, the wave is travelling along positive x-direction, therefore, phase difference between particles
at points (1m, 1m, 1m) and (2m, 2m, 2m) is due to difference between their x coordinates only.
x
The phase difference is given by   2.

Where, x   x 2  x1    2  1 m  1m
2.x
   2.5m

But v  n  , therefore,
Substituting n = 200 Hz equation (2), a  1104 m
Angular frequency, w  2n  400 rad / s
Substituting all these values in equation (1),
Angular frequency,   104 sin   400t  0.8x  m Ans. (i)
Since, due to propagation of the wave, shear strain is produced in the medium, therefore, the wave is
a plane transverse wave.

8. Due to harmonic oscillation of the block, transverse wave is produced which travel along the string.
T
Velocity of transverse wave in the string, v 

Assuming wave propagation direction to be positive x-direction and vertically upward direction to be
positive y-direction and that the block starts oscillating at t = 0 from mean position, its displacement
at time t will be
yblock  a sin  t  …(1)
Since, the end of string, connected with the block also oscillates with it, therefore displacement of
this end of string is also same as that of block.
Since. wave propagates with velocity v along the string, therefore, equation of wave travelling along
the string will be
 x
y  a sin   t   …(2)
 v
dy a  x
Slope of the string   cos   t  
dx v  v
But the block is at x = 0, therefore, substituting x = 0 in above equation,
a
Slope, tan    .cos t …(3)
v
Since, the string is thin, therefore, linear mass density  is small or velocity of wave propagation
will be very high. Hence, slope, tan  of string will be very small.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 32
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 

 sin   tan 
Vertical component of tension of string, Fv  Fsin   F tan 
Fa
Fv   cos t
v
Negative sign indicates that vertical component of tension in string at end is downwards. It means
string pulls the block downward as shown figure in or block exerts an upward force equal to Fv .
Power is transferred from block to string due to this force which is equal to where u is velocity of the
block.
d
Velocity of block at t, v  yblock  a cos t
dt
 Power transferred at time t,P  Fv .u
F2 a 2
Or P .cos 2 t …(4)
v
 Energy transferred to string during one complete oscillation
2
t Fa 2
   P dt  Ans. (i)
t 0 v
Maximum rate of transferred of energy means maximum power transferred.
F2 a 2
From equation (4). Pmax  Ans. (ii)
v

9. Since, during propagation of sound waves medium particles execute SHM, therefore, displacement
of a particle due to a wave of frequency n is given by
y  a sin  2 n1, t  or y  a sin800 t ……(i)
y2  a sin  802  t  ……(2)
y3  a sin  804 t  ……(3)
According to principle of superposition, y  y1  y2  y3
 Resultant displacement of a medium particle at time t is
y  a  sin 800t  sin 802 t  sin 804 t 
or y  a  sin 800 t  sin 804 t   sin 802  t 
or y  a 1  cos 2t  sin 802 t …..(4)
Comparing it with y  Asin t ,
Resultant amplitude A  a 1  cos 2 t  ……(5)
Since, resultant amplitude A varies with time, therefore, resultant intensity also varies with time.
Since, intensity  A 2 , therefore, intensity is maximum when A is maximum. But according to
equation (5), A maximum when cos 2 t  1
 2 t  0, 2, 4,....... or t  0,1, 2,3,......
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 33
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Hence, period of one complete cycle of intensity is one second. Ans. (i)
Since, single is detected only when A  a , therefore from equation (5), cos 2t  0 or 2  t should lie
in either first quadrant or fourth quadrant.
It means 2  t should lie between either 0 and  2 or 3 2 and 2  .
1 3
It means signal is detected when 0  t  and  t  1 during first cycle of intensity.
4 4
1 3
In other words detector remains idle from t  sec . To t  sec during first cycle of intensity or in
4 4
each cycle of intensity the defector remains idle for 0.5sec . Ans (ii)

10. Since, both the trains move in same direction with same acceleration, therefore, their relative
acceleration is zero. Initial velocity if train A is zero while that of train B is 40 ms 1 , therefore, train
A or observer is behind the train B or source when whistle is heard by passenger of A. Let this sound
be produced at time t .
Considering motion of train B (sound source) upto this instant,
u  40 ms 1, a  2 ms 2 , time  t
v  vB  ? , S  SB  ?
Using v  u  at, VB  40  2t ……(i)
1
and s  ut  at 2 , SB  40t  t …..(2)
2
But this sound is heard by the observer at t  20sec
Considering his motion (motion of train A) upto this instant,
u  0, a  2 ms 2 , t  20 sec
v  vA  ?, S  SA  ?
Using, v  u  at vA  40 ms 1
1
and s  ut  at 2 , SA  400 m
2
When sound was produced, train B (source) was at a distance SB from initial point while observer
receives this sound at t  20 sec and at distance SA from initial point.
It means that sound waves travel distance SB  SA in air and take time  20  t  to travel it.
 SB  SA    20  t  v ……(3),
Where v  322 ms 1 (speed of sound). Substituting values of SA and SB in equation (3),
t  18sec
When sound was produced, source was moving with velocity VB   40  2t   76 ms1 (away from
observer) while observer receives these sound waves at t  20sec , when he was moving with
velocity vA  40 ms 1 (towards the source).
v  vA
 Observed frequency, n  n0
v  vB
where n0  1194Hz (natural frequency of source)
 n  1086 Hz

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 34
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

WAVE OPTICS, DIFFRACTION, POLARISATION, OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CONCEPT SUMMARY

1. Reflection is governed by the equation  i   r ' and refraction by the Snell’s law. sin i / sin r  n ,
where the incident ray, reflected ray, refracted ray and normal lie in the same plane. Angles of
incidence, reflection and refraction are i, r ' and r, respectively.

2. The critical angle of incidence ic for a ray incident from a denser to rarer medium, is the angle for
which the angle of refraction is 90 o . For i  ic , total internal reflection occurs. Multiple internal
o
reflections in diamond ( ic  24.4 ), totally reflecting prisms and mirage. Optical fibres consist of
glass fibres coated with a thin layer of material of lower refractive index. Light incident at an angle
at one end comes out at the other, after multiple internal reflections, even if the fibres is bent.

3. Cartesian sign convention: Distance measured in the same direction as the incident light are positive:
those measured in the opposite direction are negative. All distances are measured from the pole/optic
centre of the mirror/lens on the principal axis of the mirror/ lens are taken as positive. The heights
measured downwards are taken as negative.

4. Mirror equation :
1 1 1
 
v u f
Where u and v are object and image distances, respectively and f is the focal length of the mirror. f is
(approximately) half the radius of curvature R. f is negative for concave mirror; f is positive for a
convex mirror.

5. For a prism of the angle A, of refractive index n 2 placed in a medium of refractive index n 1 .
sin  A  Dm  / 2 
n 21 
sin  A / 2 
Where D m is the angle of minimum deviation.

6. For refraction through a spherical interface (from medium 1 to 2 of refractive index n 1 and n 2 ,
respectively)
n 2 n1 n 2  n1
 
v u R
Thin lens formula
1 1 1
 
v u f
Lens maker’s formula
1  n 2  n1   1 1 
   
f n1  R1 R 2 
R 1 and R 2 are the radii of curvature of the lens surfaces. f is positive for a converging lens: f is
negative for a diverging lens. The power of a lens P = 1/f .
The SI unit for power of a lens is dioptre (D) : 1 D = 1 m 1 .

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 35
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

If several thin lenses of focal length f1 , f 2 , f3 ... are in contact, the effective focal length of their
combination, is given by
1 1 1 1
    ...
f f1 f 2 f 3
The total power of a combination of several lenses is
P  P1  P2  P3  .....

7. Dispersion is the splitting of light into its constituent colours.

8. The Eye : The eye has a convex lens of focal length about 2.5 cm. this focal length can be varied
somewhat so that the image is always formed on the retina. This ability of the eye is called
accommodation. In a defective eye, of the image is focused before the retina (myopia), a diverging
corrective lens is needed; if the image is focused beyond the retina (hypermetropia), a converging
corrective lens is needed. Astigmatism is corrected by using cylindrical lenses.

9. Magnifying power m of a simple microscope is given by m  1   D / f  , where D = 25 cm is the

least distance of distinct vision and f is the focal length of the convex lens. If the image is at infinity,
m = D/f. For a compound microscope, the magnifying power is given by m  m e  m 0 where
me  1   D / fe  , is the magnification due to the eyepiece and m0 is the magnification produced by
L D
the objective. Approximately, m  
f0 fe
Where f 0 and f e are the focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece, respectively, and L is the
distance between their focal points.

10. Magnifying power m of a telescope is the ratio of the angle  subtended at the eye by the image to
 f
the angle  subtended at the eye by the object. m   0
 fe
Where f0 and f e are the focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece, respectively.

RAY OPTICS
FORMULA SUMMARY

 Mirror :

1 1 1 2
(1)   
u v f R
v
(2) m=
u
(3) If there mirrors are inclined at an angle  then number of images formed
360 360
=  1 if is even
 
360 360
= if is odd and object is placed unsymmetrical
 
360 360
=  1 if is odd and object is placed symmetrical.
 
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 36
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

If  = 0 , number of images = 
h
Minimum height of mirror needed by man ( h) to see full image = . To see the wall behind him,
2
Height of wall
height of mirror =
3
Deviation by plane mirror = 180 – 2i
 Refraction:

(1) Plane surface :

2 l
(i) 
v u
(ii)  l sin 1   2 sin  2
 1
(iii) Apparent shift : d = t 1  
 
for many slabs, apparent shift
 1   1 
= t1 1   + t2 1   +……
 1    2 
 t 
(iv) Lateral shift : d =   sin(i  r)
 cos r 
 
(v) Total internal reflection taken place iff l  sin 1  2 . Here  2  1.
 1 
Re al depth
(vi) =
apparent depth

(1) Spherical surface:

 2 1  2   1 v l
(i)   (ii) m= .
v u R u 2

 Lens:

1 1 1
(i)  
v u f
1  2  1 1 
(ii)    1   
f  1  R1 R 2 

If different media exist on the two side of the lens,

 3 1  2   l     2
   1 2 3
v u R1 R2

v f f v
(iii) m = = 
u uf f

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 37
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 Power of combination of lenses and mirror

fL
fL

1 1
P P
| fL | | fL |

1 1
P P
| fm | | fm |

 Sign convention has nothing to do with the direction in which light is traveling.

Note: Formula is valid only if the refracted ray doesn’t suffer signification shift towards or away from the
principle axis, while finally emerging from the optical system and the distance between the lenses are
not significant.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
     
f eq | f  | |  | | f  | | f eq | | f  | | f m | | f  |

 Sign conversion is according to the convergence towards the principle axis :

Two half lenses having same focal length are placed as shown. The system will have infinite focal
length.

 Invalid Case :

If we have large no. of lenses placed together the method of equivalent deviation won’t work.
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 38
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 Basis of the method is superposition of deviation produced by the optical element.

The combination behaves as a mirror of power, P eff = PL 1 + PM + PL 1

Consider refraction through each surface individually, reflection at silvered surface and again
refraction through each surface.

Note: Be sure ray of light does not cross principle axis throughout its path through lenses.

(a) when lens is immersed in a liquid

g  1
F   Fa
 g 
 
   1
  

(b) Focal length of a lens by displacement method :

if for two positions of lens ( separated by x ) , two images I1 and I2 are formed at same position, for
object O and OI1 = OI2 = D, then
D2  x2
F= and O = I 1 I 2
4D

(c) If two lenses are separated by a distance d,

1 1 1 d
then   
Feq F1 F2 F1 F2
dF2
this lens is placed at a distance y = from seconds lens to its left
F1  F2  d

(d) The minimum distance between a real object and real image by single lens = 4F

 Prism:
A = r1 + r2 ,  = ( i1 + i2 – A )
For maximum deviation, i1 = 90° then i2 = sin-1 [  sin ( A - c ) ]
A
Condition for no emergence is r2 > c or  > cosec  
2
Condition for grazing emergence is i1 = sin-1 [  2  1 sin A – cos A ]

 A  m 
sin  
 2 
(i)  for small A,  m     1A
sin  A / 2 
(ii) At  = m (min. deviation ), ray passes symmetrically through prism
  r  v   r
(iii) Dispersive power   v 
y 1 y
v = violet , r = red y = yellow

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 39
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

(i) Dispersion without average deviation

Condition :  y  1A  ( y '  1) A' A w
A

Angular dispersion:  v   r   y  l A w  w 1    w

(ii) Average deviation without Dispersion

Condition :

 y  1wA   y 1  1 w 1 A1 
1
 1
  v   r A   v   r A 1 
 w 

Average deviation :    y  1 A 1  1  
 w 
Note:
B
(1) A  ( Cauchy’s relation)  :refractive index of medium
2
 :wavelength of light AB constant

(2) I  I 0 e  x
I0 = initial intensity I = intensity after absorption
x = thickness  = absorption constant

(3) In case of spherical mirror if object distance (x1) & image distance (x2)are measured from
focus instead of pole , u  f  x1 , v  f  x 2
1 1 1
    x1 x 2  f 2 (Newton 's Formula)
v u f

1 1 1
(4)  
v u f
Differentiate w.r.t. time ,
dv  v 2  du v2
   2  speed of image  2  speed of object
dt  u  dt u

WAVE OPTICS
CONCEPT SUMMARY

1. Huygens’ principle tells us that each point on a wavefront is a source of secondary waves, which add
up to give the wavefront at a later time.

2. Huygens’ construction tells us that the new wavefront is the forward envelope of the secondary
waves. When the speed of light is independent of direction, the secondary waves are spherical. The
rays are then perpendicular to both the wavefronts and the time of travel is the same measured along
any ray. This principle leads to the well known laws of reflection and refraction.

3. The principle of superposition of waves applies whenever two or more sources of light illuminate the
same point. When we consider the intensity of light due to these sources at the given point, there is
an interference term is in addition to the sum of the individual intensities.
But this term important only if it has a non-zero average, which occurs only if the sources have the
same frequency and a stable phase difference.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 40
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

4. Young’s double slit of separation d gives equally s[aced fringes of angular separation  / d . The
source, mid-point of the slits, and central bright fringe lie in a straight line. An extended source will
destroy the fringes if it subtends angle more than  / d at the slits.

5. A single slit of width a gives a diffraction pattern with a central maximum. The intensity falls to zero
 2
at angles of  ,  . etc., with successively weaker secondary maxima in between. Diffraction
 
limits the angular resolution of a telescope to  / D where D is the diameter. Two stars closer than
this give strongly overlapping images. Similarly, a microscope objective subtending angle 2 at the
focus, in a medium of refractive index n, will just separate two objects spaced at a distance
 /  2n sin  , which is the resolution limit of a microscope. Diffraction determines the limitations of
the concept of light rays. A beam of width a travels a distance a 2 /  , called the Fresnel distance,
before it starts to spread out due to diffraction.

6. Natural light, e.g., from the sun is unpolarised. This means the electric vector takes all possible
directions in the transverse plane, rapidly and randomly, during a measurement. A Polaroid transmits
only one component (parallel to a special axis). The resulting light is called linearly polarized or
plane polarised. When this kind of light is viewed through a second Polaroid whose axis turns
through 2 , two maxima and minima of intensity are seen. Polarized light can also be produced by
reflection at a special angle (called the Brewster angle) and by scattering through  / 2 in the earth’s
atmosphere.

WAVE OPTICS

FORMULA SUMMARY

If two coherent sources with intensity I1 & I2 are super imposed with phase difference
 , resulting wave has intensity
I  I1  I 2  2 I1I 2 cos  &
2 2
Amplitude is given by A 2  A1  A 2  2A1A 2 cos 

 In YDSE if x is optical path difference

For maxima x = n
 1
For minima x =  n  
 2

2  2 
Phase difference   x Phase difference = ( - l ) t   ( when thin glass slit is
   
introduced )
D
Fringe width  
d
d is distance between slits

nD
Bright fringes occur at Y  n  0,1, ...
d
& Dark fringes at Y=
2n  1 D
n  0,1,2
2d
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 41
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

(a) All maxima are equally spaced and equally bright

(b) if white light used in YDSE, then some coloured fringes are obtained
D
(c) If YDSE experiment is performed in water, then whole fringe pattern shrinks as  =
d
decreases.
(d) In Lloyd’s mirror , as a phase change of  occurs in the reflected ray :

condition for bright fringe = ( 2n + 1)
2
for dark fringe , path difference = n 

(e) Interference from thin films : -

Transmitted rays :
Constructive interference : -
2 d = n
destructive interference :
 d
2d = ( 2n + 1) ..(3)
2
Reflected rays :
Constructive interference :

2d = ( 2n +1 )
2
and destructive interference : -
2d = n

(f) Fresnel biprism :

then , D = a + b A1
S1
separation between two
sources d = ( 2  a ) = 2a (  - 1) 
S
n (a  b)
nth maximum from screen centre : x = S2 A2
2a (  1)
a b
(2n  1)D
nth minima  D
( 2d)

Note: When a film of thickness t, refractive index ‘  ’is introduced in front of one slit
 2 
Phase difference =   1t  
  
No .of fringes shifted =
  1t

x    r  1t ,  r : relative

dy
Central bright fringe at y such that =   r  1t
D

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 42
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. A convex lens forms a real image three times larger than the object on a screen. Object and
screen are moved until the image becomes twice the size of the object. If the shift of the object is
6 cm. The shift of screen is :
(a) 36 cm (b) 72 cm (c) 18 cm (d) 9 cm

2. The magnification of an object placed in front of a convex lens of focal length 20 cm is +2. To
obtain a magnification of –2, the object has to be moved by a distance equal to:
(a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm (c) 30 cm (d) 40 cm

3. For an equilateral prism, it is observed that when a ray strikes grazingly at one face it emerges
grazingly at the other. Its refractive index will be :
3 2
(a) (b) (c) 2 (d) Data not sufficient
2 3

4. A point object is placed at a distance of 25 cm from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. If a
glass slab of thickness t and refractive index 1.5 is inserted between the lens and the object, the
image is formed at infinity. The thickness t is :
(a) 10 cm (b) 5 cm (c) 20 cm (d) 15 cm

5. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between the slits d is equal to 5, where  is the
wavelength of the monochromatic light used in the experiment. Then intensity of the light in
front of one of the slits on a screen at a distance of D = 10d would be approximately :
I 3 I
(a) max (b) Imax (c) Imax (d) max
2 4 4

6. In a Young’s Double Slit Experiment, distance between slits and screen is D. 3rdmaximum is formed
at a distance y from central maximum. Now, the screen is displaced by x along perpendicular
bisector of slits. If 2 nd minimum is now formed at same distance y from central maximum then x is
D
(a) towards slits (b) 2D away from slits
2
D
(c) towards slits (d) D away from slits
4

7. P is a small angled prism of angle α = 30 made of a material of refractive index 1.5. A ray of light is
incident as shown in Fig. M is a plane mirror. The angle of deviation for the ray reflected from the
mirror M with respect to the incident ray is:
α

Incident
Ray

P M

(a) 4.50 (b) 175.30 (c) 1770 (d) 178.50

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 43
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. A plano-convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and radius of curvature 30cm is silvered at the curved
face. This lens is used to from the image of an object. At what distance from the lens, an object be
placed in order to obtain a real image equal to the size of the object?
(a) 20cm (b) 30cm (c) 60cm (d) 80cm

9. A figure PQ represents a plane wave front and AO and BP the corresponding extreme rays of
monochromatic light beam of wavelength  . The value of angle  for which the ray BP and the
reflected ray OP interfere constructively is given by
O R

 d
Q
P

A
B
   2
(a) cos   (b) cos   (c) sec   (d) sec  
2d 4d 3d 3d

2
10. A transparent solid cylindrical rod has a refractive index of . It is surrounded by air. A light ray
3
is incident at the mid-point of one end of the rod as shown in figure. The incident angle  for which
the light ray grazes along the wall of the rod is:

 2   1  1  3
(a) sin 1   (b) sin 1   (c) sin 1   (d) sin 1  
 3  3 2  2 

11. In Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity at a point P on the screen is half the maximum
intensity in the interference pattern. If the wavelength of light used is  and d is the distance
between the slits, the angular separation between point P and the centre of the screen is
        
(a) sin 1   (b) sin 1   (c) sin 1   (d) sin 1  
d  2d   3d   4d 

12. In an optics experiment, with the position of the object fixed, a student varies the position of a
convex lens and for each position, the screen is adjusted to get a clear images of the object. A graph
between the object distance u and the image distance  , from the lens, is plotted using the same
scale for the two axes. A straight line passing through the origin and making an angle of 45o with the
x-axis meets the experimental curve at P. The coordinates of P will be:
f f 
(a)  f ,f  (b)  4f , 4f  (c)  2f , 2f  (d)  , 
 2 2
13. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world contained in a circular horizon. If the
refractive index of water is 4/3 and the fish is 12 cm below the surface of water, the radius of the
circle is
12  3
(a) 12  3  5 (b) 12  3  7 (c) (d) 4  5
7

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 44
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

14. Carefully analyse the diagram and choose the correct option
(I) (II)
spherical
wave spherical
wave

Focus Focus

Plane Thick Plane Thick

Wave lens Wave lens
(III) (IV)
spherical
wave spherical
wave

Focus Focus

Plane Thick Plane Thick

Wave lens Wave lens
(a) I and II are true (b) I and III are true (c) I and IV are true (d) II and IV are true

3
15. When a thin transparent sheet of refractive index   is placed near one of the slits in Young’s
2
double slit experiment; the intensity at the centre of the screen reduces to half of the maximum
intensity. The minimum thickness of the sheet should be
   
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 8 2 3

16. The x-z plane separates two media A and B of refractive indices µ1 = 1.5 and µ2 = 2. A ray of light

travels from A to B. its directions in the two media are given by unit vectors u1  aiˆ  bjˆ and

u 2  ciˆ  djˆ . Then
a 4 a 3 b 4 b 3
(a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 
c 3 c 4 d 3 d 4

17. An equilateral prism ABC is placed in air with its base side BC lying horizontally along X axis as
shown in the figure. A ray given by 3 Z + X = 10 is incident at a point P on face AB of the prism.
The value of  for which the ray grazes the face AC is
Z

A
P
(0, 0, 0) 60º
X
B C

Y
1 2 3 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 3 2 3
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 45
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

18. A horizontal beam of vertically polarized light of intensity 43 w/m2 is sent through two polarizing
sheets. The polarizing direction of the first is 600 to the vertical and that of the second is horizontal.
What is the intensity of the light transmitted by the pair of sheets?
(a) 2.66 W/m2 (b) 1.8 W/m2 (c) 8.1 W/m2 (d) none

19. Light of intensity I0 incident on a polarizer and the emerging light strikes a second polarized filter
with its axis at 450 to that of the first. The intensity of the emerging beam is
(a) I 0 / 2 (b) 3I 0 / 4 (c) I 0 / 4 (d) none

20. When a polarizer is placed in front of each slit of YDSE in such a way that polarizing axes are
perpendicular to each other. What changes be observed in the fringe pattern
(a) Intensity of bright fringe will decrease but greater than zero
(b) Intensity of dark fringe will increase
(c) Fringe pattern will not appear
(d) None

21. How many polarizer must needed to decrease intensity of transmitted light to 10% of incident
unpolarized light ( given each polarizer is at an angle of 450 to the previous one)
(a) 5 (b) 4 (c) 3 (d) none

22. A slit of width d is illuminated by red light of wave length 650 nm. For what value of d will the first
minimum fall at an angle of diffraction of 300?
(a) 1300 nm (b) 2600 nm (c) 2000 nm (d) none

23. Diffraction effects are more pronounced or easier to notice in the case of sound waves than in the
case of light waves, because
(a) Sound travels faster than light (b) Sound wave have a smaller wavelength
(c) Sound waves are of longer wavelength (d) Sound wave are longitudinal

24. A compound microscope is of magnifying power 100. The magnifying power of its eyepiece is 4. the
magnification of its objective is
(a) +20 (b) –20 (c) 25 (d) –25

25. The focal length of a convex lens is 10 cm. find its magnifying power when it is used as a
magnifying glass to form the image at near point
(a) 3.5 (b) 2.5 (c) 1.5 (d) none

26. An astronomical telescope consists of two thin lenses set 52 cm apart. Its magnifying power is 25 for
normal adjustment. The focal length of the lenses are
(a) 040 and 12 (b) 50 and 2 (c) 20 and 32 (d) none

27. The focal length of the objective and eyepiece of a telescope are 60 cm and 5 cm respectively. The
telescope is focused on an object 360 cm from the objective and the final image is formed at a
distance of 30 cm from the eye of the observer. The length of the telescope will be
(a) 76.3 cm (b) 72.5 cm (c) 56.4 cm (d) none

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 46
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

28. In figure, a wave front AB moving in air is incident on a plane glass surface XY. Its position CD after
refraction through a glass slab is shown also along with the normal drawn at A and D. The refractive
index of the glass with respect to air will be equal to

(a) BD/AC (b) AB/CD (c) BD/AD (d) AC/AD

29. In a YDSE experiment the first bright fringe occurs at an angle of  450 , when experiment is
conducted in air. Now setup is inserted in liquid medium, such that the first bright fringe occurs at
 300 . The index of refraction of the liquid is
(a) 1.5 (b) .866 (c) 1.732 (d) none

30. In YDSE, the two slits are separated by 0.1mm and they are 0.5 m from the screen. The wavelength
of light used is 500 nm. What is the distance between 7 th maxima and 11th minima on the screen?
(a) 5.65 mm (b) 6.75 mm (c) 8.75 mm (d) 7.8 mm

31. Young’s double slit experiment is carried out using microwaves of wavelength   3cm . Distance
between the slits is d = 5 cm and the distance between the plane of slits and the screen is D = 100
cm. then what is the number of maximas and their positions on the screen
(a) 3, 0 and  75 cm (b) 4,1 and  60 cm
(c) 3, 0 and  55 cm (d) none

32. A plane mirror is moving with velocity 4iˆ  5 ˆj  8kˆ . A point object in front of the mirror moves with
a velocity 3iˆ  4 ˆj  5kˆ . Here kˆ is along the normal to the plane mirror and facing towards the object.
The velocity of the image is:
(a) 3iˆ  4 ˆj  5kˆ (b) 3iˆ  4 ˆj  11kˆ (c) 3iˆ  4 ˆj  11kˆ (d) 7iˆ  9 ˆj  11kˆ

33. A point source of length S is located on a wall. A plane mirror M having length l is moving parallel to
the wall with constant velocity v. The bright patch formed on the wall by reflected light will

(a) move with uniform velocity v and will have a length 2l.
(b) move with uniform velocity 2v and will have a length l.
(c) move with uniform velocity 2v and will have a length 2l.
(d) move with uniform velocity but will have a changing length.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 47
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

34. Behind a thin converging lens having both the surfaces of the same radius 10 cm, a plane mirror has
been placed. The image of an object at a distance 40 cm from the lens is formed at the same position.
What is the refractive index of the lens?

(a) 1.5 (b) 5/3 (c) 9/8 (d) None

35. A ray of light parallel to the axis of a converging lens (having focal length f) strikes it at a small
distance ‘h’ from its optical centre. A thin prism having angle  and refractive index  is placed
normal to the axis of lens at a distance ‘d’ from it. What should be the value of  so that the ray
emerges parallel to the lens

h h h h
(a) (b) 1 (c) (d) 1
f f (d  f ) (d  f )

36. An infinitely long rod lies along the axis of a concave mirror of focal length f. The near end of the
rod is at a distance u > f from the mirror. Its image will have a length
f2 uf f2 uf
(a) (b) (c) (d)
uf u f u f uf

37. A ray of light moving along the unit vector (–i –2j) undergoes refraction at an interface of two
media, which is the x-z plane. The refractive index for y > 0 is 2 while for y < 0, it is 5 / 2 . The unit
vector along which the refracted ray moves is :

(a)
 
3iˆ  5ˆj
(b)

4iˆ  3jˆ (c)

3iˆ  4jˆ  (d) None of these
34 5 5

38. A parallel sided block of glass of refractive index 1.5 which is 36 mm thick rests
on the floor of a tank which is filled with water (refractive index = 4/3). The
difference between apparent depth of floor at A & B when seen from vertically
above is equal to
(a) 2 mm (b) 3 mm A B
(c) 4 mm (d) none of these

39. A beam of light is converging towards a point 1. A plane parallel plate


of glass of thickness t, refractive index  is introduced in the path of
the beam. The covergent point is shifted by (assume near normal
incidence) : I
(a) t (1 – 1/) away (b) t (1 + 1/) away
(c) t (1 – 1/) nearer (d) t (1 + 1/) nearer t

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 48
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

B E
40. In the figure ABC is the cross section of a right angled prism and
BCDE is the cross section of a glass slab. The value of  so that
light incident normally on the face AB does not cross the face BC

n = 6/5
n = 3/2
is
(given sin–1(3/5 = 37o)
(a)   37o (b)  > 37o 
(c)   53 o
(d)  < 53o A
C D

41. A vertical pencil of rays comes from bottom of a tank filled with a liquid. When it is accelerated with
an acceleration of 7.5 m/s2, the ray is seen to be totally reflected by liquid surface. What is minimum
possible refractive index of liquid ?
(a) slightly greater than 4/3 (b) slightly greater than 5/3
(c) slightly greater than 1.5 (d) slightly greater than 1.75

42. A fish is near the centre of a spherical bowl filled with water ( = 4/3). A child stands in air at a
distance 2R (R is the radius of curvature of the sphere) from the centre of the bowl. At what distance
from the centre would the child nose appear to the fish situated at the centre :
(a) 4R (b) 2R (c) 3R (d) 4R

43. A object is placed at a distance of 15 cm from a convex lens

of focal length 10 cm. On the other side of the lens, a convex
mirror is place at its focus such that the image formed by the
combination coincides with the object itself. The focal length O
of the convex mirror is
(a) 20 cm (b) 10 cm
(c) 15 cm (d) 30 cm

44. A thin lens of focal length f and its aperture has a diameter d. It forms an image of intensity I. Now
the central part of the aperture upto diameter (d/2) is blocked by an opaque paper. The focal length
and image intensity would change to
(a) f/2, I/2 (b) f, I/4 (c) 3f/4, I/2 (d) f, 3I/4

45. An object is placed in front of a thin convex lens of focal length 30 cm and a plane mirror is placed
15 cm behind the lens. If the final image of the object coincides with the object the distance of the
object from the lens is
(a) 60 cm (b) 30 cm (c) 15 cm (d) 25 cm
37O
o o 53O
46. A ray incident at an angle 53 on a prism emerges at an angle at 37 as shown. If
the angle of incidence is made 50o, which of the following is a possible value of
the angle of emergence.
(a) 35 o (b) 42 o (c) 40 o (d) 38 o

47. A certain prism is found to produce a minimum deviation of 38 o. It produces a deviation of 44o when
the angle of incident is either 42o or 62o. What is the angle of incidence when it is undergoing
minimum deviation ?
(a) 45 o (b) 49 o (c) 40 o (d) 55 o

48. A thin prism of angle 5 o is placed at a distance of 10 cm from object. What is the distance of the
image from object ? (Given  of prism = 1.5)
  5 
(a) cm (b) cm (c) cm (d) cm
8 12 36 7
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 49
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

49. Plane parallel wavefronts encounter the interface one medium and another as shown below. The
wave speed is different in the two media.

What will happen to the distance between wavefronts and the direction of travel wavefronts, as the
waves enter the second medium ?
(a) The distance between wavefronts remains unchanged but the direction of wavefront changes.
(b) The distance between wavefronts and the direction of wavefront both remain unchanged
(c) The distance between wavefronts and the direction of wavefront both changed
(d) The distance between wavefronts changes but the direction of wavefront remains unchanged.

o
50. In Young’s double slit experiment, the wavelength of red light is 7800 A and that of blue light is
o
5200 A . The value of n for which nth bright band due to red light coincides with (n + 1)th bright band
due to blue light, is :
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

51. Two identical narrow slits S1 and S2 are illuminated by light

of wavelength  from a point source P. If, as shown in the S1
diagram above the light is then allowed to fall on a screen, l1
l3
and if n is a positive integer, the condition for destructive P
interference at Q is that l2
(a) (l1 – l2) = (2n + 1) /2 S2 l4 Q
(b) (l3 – l4) = (2n + 1) /2
(c) (l1 + l2) – (l2 + l4) = n
(d) (l1 + l3) – (l2 + l4) = (2n + 1) /2

52. In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits act as coherent sources of equal amplitude A and
wavelength . In another experiment with the same setup the two slits are sources of equal amplitude
A and wavelength  but are incoherent. The ratio of the intensity of light at the midpoint of the
screen in the first case to that in the second case is
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 4 : 1 (d) none of these

53. In a Young’s double slit experiment, a small detector measures an intensity of illumination of I units
at the centre of the fringe pattern. If one of the two (identical) slits is now covered, the measured
intensity will be
(a) 2I (b) I (c) I/4 (d) I/2

54. In a Young’s Double slit experiment, first maxima is observed at a

fixed point P on the screen. Now the screen is continuously moved
away from the plane of slits. The ratio of intensity at point P to the
P
intensity at point O (centre of the screen)
O
(a) remains constant
(b) keeps on decreasing
(c) first decreases and then increases
(d) first decreases and then becomes constant
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 50
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

55. In the figure shown of parallel beam of white light is incident on the
plane of the slits then the distance of the white spot on the screen from
O is [Assume d << D,  << d]
(a) 0 (b) d/2 d 2d/3
O
(c) d/3 (d) d/6

56. In the figure shown in YDSE, a parallel beam of light is incident D

on the slit from a medium of refractive index n1. The wavelength
n
of light in this medium is 1. A transparent slab of thickness ‘t’ n3
n2
and refractive index n3 is put infront of one slit. The medium
between the screen and the plane of the slits is n2. The phase O
difference between the light waves reacting point ‘O’
(symmetrical, relative to the slits) is : 
2 2
(a)  n3  n2  t (b)  n3  n 2  t
n11 1
2n1  n 3  2n1
(c)   1 t (d)  n 3  n1  t
n 21  n 2  1

57. In the YDSE shown the two slits are covered with thin sheets having t, 2
thickness t & 2t and refractive index 2 and . Find the position (y) of v
d
central maxima
tD tD , 2t
(a) zero (b) (c)  (d) None D
d d

58. The polarizing angle of diamond is 67 0 . The critical angle of diamondis nearest to
(a) 22 0 (b) 34 0 (c) 45 0 (d) 60 0

59. A clear sheet of polaroid is placed on the top of similar sheet so that their axes make an angle
3
sin 1   with each other. The ratio of intensity of the emergent light to that of unpolarised incident
5
light is
(a) 16 : 25 (b) 9 : 25 (c) 4 : 5 (d) 8 : 25

60. Two nicol prisms (polarizer and analyser) have their axes at angle of 30 0 in between. If I is the
intensity of light falling on first nicol, then of emerging light is
(a) 0.125I (b) 0.25I (c) 0.375I (d) 0.5 I

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 51
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. White light is used to illuminate the two slits in a Young’s double slit experiment. The separation
between the slits is b and the screen is at a distance d(>> b) from the slits. At a point on the screen
directly in front of one of the slits, certain wavelengths are missing. Some of these missing
wavelengths are
b2 2b 2 b2 2b 2
(a)   (b)   (c)   (d)  
d d 3d 3d

2. In the displacement method, the distance between object and screen is 96 cm. The ratio of length of
two images formed by a convex lens placed between them is 4.84
(a) ratio of length of object to length of shorter image is 11/5
(b) distance between two positions of lens is 36 cm
(c) focal length of lens is 22.5 cm
(d) distance of the lens from the shorter image is 30 cm.

3. A thin paper of thickness 0.02 mm having refractive index 1.45 is pasted across one of the slit in a
Young’s double slit experiment. The paper transmits 4/9 of light falling on it.
(Wavelength = 600 nm).
(a) Amplitude of light wave transmitted through the paper will be 2/3 time of incident wave.
(b) The ratio of maximum and minimum intensity in the fringe pattern will be 25.
(c) The total number of fringe crossing the centre if an identical paper is pasted on the other slit is 15.
(d) The ratio of maximum and minimum intensity in the pattern will be 5.

4. A lens is placed in the XYZ coordinate system such that its optical center is at the origin and
principal axis is along the X axis. The focal length of the lens is 20 cm. A point object has been
placed at the point (– 40 cm, + 1cm, –1 cm). Which of the following are correct about coordinates of
the image?
(a) x = 40 cm (b) y = + 1 cm (c) z = + 1 cm (d) z = – 1 cm

5. In YDSE the interference two wavelengths of light are used simultaneously where 2  21 . In the
fringe pattern observed on the screen,
(a) Maxima of wavelength 2 can coincide with minima of wavelength 1 .
(b) Fringe width of 2 will be double that of fringe width of 1 and nth order maxima of 2 will
coincide with 2nth order maxima of 1
(c) nth order maxima of 2 will coincide with 2nth order minima of 1
(d) none of the above

6. In a prism of angle A and refractive index  , if the maximum deviation occurs then which is not
possible
(a)The angle of incidence is 90 0
(b)The angle of incidence is sin 1   2  1(sin A)  cos A 
 
(c)The angle of emergence is sin   sin( A  C )
1

(d)The angle of emergence is equal to the angle of incidence

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 52
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

7. A converging lens of focal length F1 is placed in front of and coaxially with a convex mirror of focal
length F2. Their separation is d. a parallel beam of light incident on the lens returns as a parallel beam
from the arrangement
(a)The beam diameters of the incident and reflected beams must be the same
(b) d  f1  2 f 2
(c) d  f1  f 2
(d) If the entire arrangement is immersed in water, the conditions will remain unaltered

8. A thin lens with focal length f to be used as a magnifying glass. Which of the following statements
regarding the situation is true?
(a) A converging lens may be used, and the object be placed at a distance greater than 2f from the
lens.
(b) A diverging lens may be used, and the object be placed between f and 2f from the lens.
(c) A converging lens may be used, and the object be placed at a distance less than f from the lens.
(d) A diverging lens may be used, and the object be placed at any point other than the focal point

9. Figure shows converging rays on a glass slab placed in air. O is point of intersection of incident rays.
I1 and I2 are image formed after refraction at S1 and S2 surface respectively. Mark the correct
option(s)
S1 S2

incident ray

O I2 I1

(a) for refraction at S2, I1 is real object and I2 is real image

(b) for refraction at S1, O is real object and I1 is its real image.
(c) for refraction at surface S1, O is virtual object and I1 is real image
(d) for refraction at surface S2, I1 is virtual object and I2 is real image

10. Two objects are placed on the principal axis of a thin converging lens. One is 10 cm from the lens
and the other is on the other side of the lens at a distance of 40 cm from the lens. The images of both
objects are in the same plane. Which of following is true?
(a) Focal length of lens is 16 cm (b) Focal length of lens is 4 cm
(c) Image will form at 80/3 cm from lens (d) Data insufficient

11. Which of the following may describe a hologram?

(a) The light used to form the hologram must be coherent
(b) It forms a true three dimensional image of an object
(c) The hologram image looks the same when viewed from all perspectives or directions
(d) It is a photographic image of an interference pattern

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 53
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

12. The magnifying power of a small telescope is 20 and the separation between its objective and eye
piece is 42 cm in normal setting.
(a) Focal length of objective is 40 cm and eyepiece is 2 cm
(b) Focal length of objective is 2 cm and eyepiece is 40
(c) To get maximum magnification from the telescope, length of tube should decrease
(d) To get maximum magnification from the telescope, length of tube should increase
Y
13. A reflecting surface is represented by the equation
incident ray
2L  x 
Y= sin   O < x < L. A ray travelling horizontally
  L  X
becomes vertical after reflection. The coordinates of the
point (s) where this ray is incident is
 L 2L   L 3L   3L 2L   2L 3L 
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  (c)  ,  (d)  , 
4   3    4    3  

14. A ray of light in a liquid of refractive index 1.4, approaches the boundary surface between the liquid
and air at an angle of incidence whose sine is 0.8. Which of the following statements is correct about
the behaviour of the light ?
(a) It is impossible to predict the behaviour of the light ray on the basis of the information supplied
(b) The sine of the angle of refraction of the emergent ray will less than 0.8
(c) The ray will be internally reflected
(d) The sine of the angle of refraction of the emergent ray will be greater than 0.8

15. In the diagram shown, a ray of light is incident on the interface between 1 and 2 at angle slightly
greater than critical angle. The light suffers total internal reflection at this interface. After that the
light ray falls at the interface of 1and 3, and again it suffers total internal reflection. Which of the
following relations should hold true ?

1 2

3
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(a) 1 < 2 < 3 (b) 1  2  3 (c) 1 3  2 (d) 1  2  3

16. For refraction through a small angled prism, the angle of deviation ;
(a) increases with the increase in R. I. of prism
(b) will decrease with the increase in R. I. of prism
(c) is directly proportional to the angle of prism
(d) will be 2D for a ray of R. I. = 2.4 if it is D for a ray of R. I. = 1.2

17. For the refraction of light through a prism

(a) For every angle of deviation there are two angles of incidence
(b) The light travelling inside an equilateral prism is necessarily parallel to the base when prism is set
for minimum deviation
(c) There are two angles of incidence for maximum deviation
(d) Angle of minimum deviation will increase if refractive index of prism is increased keeping the
outside medium unchanged if p > S

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 54
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

18. A parallel beam of white light is made to fall on an equiconvex lens made of glass. When the screen
is kept at a distance of 10 cm, a spot of violet light is observed at centre and outer ring of red colour
of radius 1 mm. The radius of curvature of lens is 6 cm each and aperture diameter is 2 cm. Then :
(a) Refractive index of the glass for red light is 1.27
(b) Refractive index of the glass for red light is 1.3
(c) Dispersive power of lens is nearly 0.1
(d) Dispersive power of lens is nearly 0.2

19. If the source of light used in a Young’s Double Slit Experiment is changed from red to blue, then
(a) the fringes will become brighter
(b) consecutive fringes will come closer
(c) the number of maxima formed on the screen increases
(d) the central bright fringe will become a dark fringe

20. In a Young’s double slit experiment, green light is incident on fringes

the two slits. The interference pattern is observed on a screen.
Which of the following changes would cause the observed
fringes to be more closely spaced ?
(a) Reducing the separation between the slits
(b) Using blue light instead of green light
(c) Used red light instead of green light incoming light waves
(d) Moving the light source further away from the slits

21. In a standard YDSE apparatus a time film ( = 1.5, t = 2.1 m) is placed in front of upper slit. How
far above or below the centre point of the screen are two nearest maxima located ?
Take D = 1 m, d = 1 mm,  = 4500.
(a) 1.5 mm (b) 0.6 mm (c) 0.15 mm (d) 0.3 mm

DIRECTIONS : QUESTION NOS.22 TO 24

The figure shows a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of Young’s Double slit
Experiment
S1
a
d O
Screen
 S2
D

22. Choose the correct statement (s) related to the wavelength of light used
(a) Larger the wavelength of light larger the fringe width
(b) The position of central maxima depends on the wavelength of light used
(c) If white light is used in YDSE, then the violet colour forms its first maxima closest to the central
maxima
(d) The central maxima of all the wavelengths coincide

23. If the distance D is varied, then choose the correct statement(s)

(a) The angular fringe width does not change
(b) The fringe width changes in direct proportion
(c) The change in fringe width is same from all wavelengths
(d) The position of central maxima remains unchanged

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 55
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

24. If the distance d is varied, then identify the correct statement

(a) The angular width does not change (b) The fringe width changes in inverse proportion
(c) The positions of all maxima change (d) The positions of all minima change

25. Consider a case of thin film interference as shown. Thickness of film is equal
to wavelength of light in 2.
(a) Reflected light will be maximum if 1 < 2 < 3
(b) Reflected light will be maximum if 1 < 2 > 3 1
(c) Transmitted light will be maxima if 1 < 2 < 3 2
(d) Transmitted light will be maxima if 1 < 2 > 3 3

INTEGER TYPE

1. A narrow beam of light passing through the hemisphere of material with refractive index  ,
intersects at point O. Where does the beam converge (i.e. y in cm) if the beam were to travel in the
opposite direction as shown in figure (b)? The value of x is given to be 10 cm. Radius of the
hemisphere is also 10 cm.
= = = =

= == O = ==
= = = =
= =
= = x y = =
= =

(a) (b)

2. In a YDSE a parallel light beam containing wavelength 1  300nm and 2  500nm is incident on a
diaphragm having two narrow slits. Separation between the slits is d = 2mm. if the distance between
diaphragm and screen is D = 40 cm, the distance between two consecutive black lines comes out to
be y 104 m . Find y?

3. In an astronomical telescope the focal length of the objective and the eye piece are 100 cm and 5 cm
respectively. If the telescope is focused on a scale 2 m from the objective the final image is formed at
25 cm from the eye. The magnitude of magnification will be

4. In the above figure, polarizer a , b and c having transmission axis along y direction where as
polarizer d having transmission axis along x direction initially. Polarizer a and d are fixed while
polarizer B and D are rotating with angular velocity  and 2  in opposite direction respectively.

Find final intensity at t  , if initial intensity is 96 watt/m2
3

5. In a YDSE experiment, the upper slit is covered by a thin glass plate of refractive index 1  2.1
while the lower slit is covered by another glass plate having the same thickness as the first one but
having refractive index  2  2.4 . Interference pattern is observed using light of wavelength
  600nm . It is found that the point P on the screen where the central maxima fell before the glass
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 56
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

plates were inserted, now has 3/4 the original intensity. It is further observed that what used to be the
fourth maxima earlier, lies below the point P while the fifth minima lies above the point P. Neglect
absorption of light by glass plates. If thickness of the glass plates is ‘t’ in meter, find value of
3t 106
?
5

SUBJECTIVE TYPE

1. A rod made of glass ( = 1.5) and of square cross-section is bent into the shape shown in figure. A
parallel beam of light falls perpendicularly on the plane flat surface A. d is the width as shown of &
d
R is the radius of inner semicircle. Find the maximum value of   so that all light entering the
R
glass through surface A emerge from the glass through surface B.
semi circle

A B

2. A ray of light of intensity I is incident on a parallel glass-slab at a point A as shown in figure. It

undergoes partial reflection and refraction. At each reflection 20% of incident energy is reflected.
The rays AB and AB undergo interference. Find the ratio Imax /Imin.
B B

A A

3. A lens ( – 1.5) is coated with a thin film of refractive index 1.2 in order to reduce the reflection
o
from its surface at  = 4800 A . Find the minimum thickness of the film which will minimize the
intensity of the reflected light. (Assume near normal incidence).

4. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the upper slit is covered by a thin glass plate of refractive index
1.4 while the lower slit is covered by another glass plate having the same thickness as the first one
o
but having refractive index 1.7. Interference pattern is observed using light of wavelength 5400 A . It
is found that the point P on the screen where the central maximum (n = 0) fell before the glass plates
were inserted now has 3/4 the original intensity. It is further observed that what used to be the 5 th
maximum earlier lies below the point P while the 6th minimum lies above P. Calculate the thickness
of the glass plate. (Absorption of light by glass plate may be neglected)

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 57
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ANSWER KEY

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. (D) 5. (A)

6. (D) 7. (D) 8. (A) 9. (B) 10. (B)

11. (D) 12. (C) 13. (C) 14. (C) 15. (C)

16. (A) 17. (B) 18. (C) 19. (C) 20. (C)

21. (B) 22. (A) 23. (C) 24. (D) 25. (A)

26. (B) 27. (A) 28. (A) 29. (C) 30. (C)

31. (A) 32. (B) 33. (C) 34. (C) 35. B

36. (A) 37. (B) 38. (B) 39. (A) 40. (A)

41. (B) 42. (C) 43. (B) 44. (D) 45. (B)

46. (D) 47. (B) 48. (C) 49. (C) 50. (B)

51. (D) 52. (B) 53. (C) 54. (C) 55. (D)

56. (A) 57. (B) 58. (A) 59. (D) 60. (C)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (A, C) 2. (A, B, D) 3. (A, B, C) 4. (A,C) 5. (B)

6. (B,D) 7. (A,B) 8. (B,C) 9. (C,D) 10. (A,C)

11. (A,B,D) 12. (A,C) 13. (B, D) 14. (C) 15. (B, C, D)

16. (A, C) 17. (B, C, D) 18. (A, C) 19. (B, C) 20. (B)

21. (C,D) 22. (A, C, D) 23. (A,B,D) 24. (B,D) 25. (A, D)

INTEGER

1. 5 2. 3 3. 6 4. 9 5. 5

SUBJECTIVE

d 1
1.    2. 81 : 1 3. 10–7 m 4. 9.3M
 R max 2

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 58
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

WAVE OPTICS, DIFFRACTION, POLARISATION,

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS (SOLUTION)
SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1 1 1
1.  
3x x f

6 cm x 3x
2 (6 + x)

4 1
or  ...(i)
3x f
1 1 1
 
6  x  6  x f
3 1
or  ...(ii)
26  x  f
(i) and (ii) gives
4 3

3x 2  6  x 
  9x = 48 + 8x
x = 48 cm
Shift of screen = 3x – 2(6 + x)
= 3 × 48 – 2(6 + 48)
= 36 cm

2. When magnification is + 2 :
u = –x
v = – 2x
and f = + 20
1 1 1
Applying  
v u 20
we have
or x = 10 cm
When magnification is –2 :
u =– y
v = + 2y
and f = + 20
1 1 1
Hence,  
2y y 20
or y = 30 cm
  y – x = 20 cm

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 59
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

3. i 1 = i 2 = 90°
r1 = r2
A
 = 30°
2
sin i1
 =2
sin r1

4. Image will be formed at infinity if object is placed at focus of the lens, i.e., at 20
cm from the lens. Hence,
3 2

 1
 1
Shift = 25  20  1   t
 
 1 
or 5  1  t
 1.5 
5 1.5
or t   15cm
0.5

yd
5. Path difference, x 
D
d 5
Here, y 
2 2
and D = 10d = 50
 5   5  
Hence, x     
 2   50  4
Corresponding phase difference would be
 2  
    .  x  
   2
 
or 
2 4

  I  I max cos 2  
2
 I
  I max cos 2    max
4 2

6. (4)
3w ' 3 D '  3D
Suppose fringe width is changed from w to w’.  3w or  or D’ = 2D
2 2d d
Therefore, displacement of screen x = D’ – D = 2D – D = D.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 60
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

7. (4)
Deviation produced by prism, d 1 = (n – 1)A = (1.5 – 1)x30 = 1.50, C.W.
Angle of incidence on the mirror, i = 1.50
Deviation produced by mirror, d2 = (180 – 2i) = 177 0, C.W. or total deviation, d = d1 + d 2 =
0
178.5

1 2 1
8.  
F f fm
Where f  focal length of the lens before silvering
f m  focal length of concave mirror.
Using R1   and R 2  30cm in
1  1 1 
    1   
f  R1 R 2 
We get f  60cm
R
Also f m  2  15cm
2
1 2 1
    F  10cm
F 60 15

Given m    1 . Thus    u
u
1 1 1 1 1 2
    
F  u u u 4
 u  2F  20cm

9. Since P and Q are points on the same wavefront, they are in the same phase. Therefore, the path
difference at point P between the ray BP and the reflected ray OP is
  QO  OP
PR d
Now, in triangle POR, OP   . Also in triangle QOP, QO  OP sin  90o  2  OP cos 2
cos  cos 
   OP cos 2  OP
 OP  cos 2  1  2 OP cos 2 
d
 2  cos2   2d cos 
cos 

Since there is a sudden path change of due to reflection, the condition of constructive interference
2
at P is
 3
 , etc.
2 2
 3
Or 2d cos   , ,...etc
2 2
 3
Or cos   , ,...etc
4d 4d

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 61
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

2
10. Using Snell’s law 1 sin   sin 
3
2
 sin   sin 
3
Critical angle i c is given by
1 3
sin i c  
 2
3 3

 sin 90o     2
 cos  
2
12
 3 1
Therefore, sin     4

1  cos 2    1   
 2
2 1 1  1 
 sin        sin 1  
3 2 3  3

11. If  is the phase difference between the interfering waves at point P, then the intensity at point P is

I  I max cos 2  
2
I
given I  max . Hence
2
 1  
cos 2    , which gives 
2 2 2 4

Or 
2

12. For a convex lens forming a real image

1 1 1
  (1)
 u f
The graph of  against u is as given figure.
Since the u and  scales are the same, u   at point P. Putting u   uin Eq. (1) gives u  2f . Also

  2f . Hence the correct choice is (c)

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 62
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

4
13. sin c  1sin 90º
3

3 3
sin c  , tan c 
4 7
12  3
r  12 tan c  cm
7

14. (3)
The rays of light first converges and then diverges

15. (3)

I  I0  I0  2I0 cos  2I0  2I0  2I0 cos 

 3
cos   O   ,  ......
2 2
2  
 x   x min  
 2 2
 
    1 t   t
4 2

16. (1)

i

x  z plane
r

u.jˆ
cos   b
u ˆj

 sin i  a  a 2  b2  1
Similarly sin r  c u,sin  i  u 2 sin  r
From snell’s law u,sin   u 2 sin r
a 4
1.5a  2c 
c 3

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 63
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

17. (b)
Given 3 Z + X = 10
1
x   3Z  10 , tan   
3
Therefore ray incident normally on the face AB.
Thus the angle of incidence on face AC is 60º.
For grazing
A

30º

60º

B C
 sin 60º = 1 × sin 90 (Snell’s law)
2
   .
3

18. I1  43 cos 2 60 o
43

4
43 2 o 43 3
I2  cos 30  
4 4 4
129
  8.1w / m2
16

I0
19. I1 
2
I 1 I
I2  0  0
22 4

20. C (No interference)

I0
21. I1 
2
I I0
I2  0 I3 
4 8
I0
I4  less than 10%
16

22.   dsin 30o

d  2  1300 nm

23. Due to longer wavelength of sound. Diffraction occur more.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 64
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

24. 100  m e m 0
m0  25 (D)

D 25
25. m  1  1   3.5
f 10

f0
26. f 0  fe  52  25
fe
Solve f 0  50, f e  2

27. f 0  60 fe  5
1 1 1 1 1 1
   
v 360 60 v 60 360
5 1
  v  72 u
360 72
1 1 1 1 1 1 7
    
30 72 u 5 u 5 30 30
30
u
7
30
Length = 72   76.3
7
28. AC  1BD
  BD/ AC

B1
29. tan 45o 
D

y
45o
D

D
1 d
dD
B D
tan 30o  2  
D Dd
1 1
    3  1.732
3 

30. 7th maximum = 7


11th minimum = 10 
2
 7 7  .5  500 109
y  3   
2 2 .1103
= 8.75 mm
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 65
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

31. d  n only 2 integer values are possible n= 0, n = 1

Total 3 maximum
d sin   
3
sin  
5
3 y
tan  
4 D
3
y  100  75
4

32. no effect as i & ˆj velocity.

In k̂ VI  2Vm  V0
 16  5  11
ˆ ˆ ˆ
VI  3i  4j  11k

33.

v

x x

 x x
Length of dot     x      x   2
d  2x 
VI   2V
dt

2    1 2
34. Peff  2P 
10
2 1
    1 
5 f eff
 5 
2    40
 2    1 
1
  1    9
8 8

35.

x
h
x

f

d

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 66
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

h
tan x  x 
f
Deviation
x     1 
h
    1 
f
h
  1
f0

36. (a)

37. (b)

1  2
i
n
5 r
1 
2
N̂   j

From Snell’s law


 ˆi  2ˆj    ˆ ˆ
5   i  yj
  
ˆ     rˆ  N
1  rˆ1  N  2  1
ˆ
  2
 5
ˆ 
 j   
 2  1  y2
ˆ
 j 

 
   
2 5 1  5 3
    1  y2   y
5 2  1  y2  4 4
 
 3 ˆ
 ˆi  yjˆ   I  j 
4  4iˆ  3jˆ
r̂   r̂   r̂ 
1 y 2
1  9 / 16 5

Method II
 
1  
r   ˆj  r cos i i
1  2
i
ri

  
ˆi  2ˆj  ˆj  5 cos i n
5 r
2 1 1 
cos i = or sin i  2 
5 5 rr N̂  ˆj
Applying Snell’s Law
1 sin i = 2 sin r
1 5
2  sin r
5 2
4 3
sin r = , cos r =
5 5

1  
r   ˆj  r cos rr

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 67
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

3
 ˆi  yjˆ    ˆj  1  y2
5
3
5y  3 1  y 2  y
4
 ˆ 3 ˆ

rr 
 iˆ  yjˆ 
 i  j 
r̂r  
4 
rB 3
2

1  
4
4iˆ  3ˆj
r̂ 
5

1
38. Shift through glass = 36 1   = 12 mm
 3
 1
Shift through water = 36  1   = 9 mm
 3
Difference = 3 mm
Difference of apparent depth of A and B A B
= apparent depth of B –apparent depth of A
36 36
=   Difference of apparent depth of A and B = 27 – 24
4/3 3/ 2
Difference of apparent depth of A and B 3 mm

39. (a)
 1
Shift is always t 1   in the direction of incidence ray.
 

40. (a)
B E
n = 3/2

n = 6/5

90o


A
C D

For total internal reflection  90o –   C

o
90 – C   ..... (1)
For refraction at surface BC
3 3 4
sin C  sin 90o  sin C =
2 5 5
C = 53 o ..... (2)
o o
From 1 & 2  90 – 53    37o  

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 68
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

N
41. (b)
Due to pseudo force, liquid surface will become be inclined a 
a
 g
for T.I.R
i>C
sin i > sin C

1
sin i >
 N
a 1

a g2 2 
i
a 2  g2
>
a
2 2
15 / 2   10 
>
15 / 2 
 > 5/3

42. (c) 1  1
2  4 / 3

FF P O

 2 1  2  1 4 1 4 / 3 1 4 1 1
       
v u R 3v R R 3v 3R R
4 1 3 4R
  v  v = –2R
3v 3R 2
Distance of image from centre = 3R

43. (b)

C
O

15 cm 10 cm 2 cm

To retrace the path after reflection from mirror rays after refraction from lens must incident towards
centre of curvature of mirror
1 1 1 1 1 1
Image by lens     
v u f 10  2f m 15 10
1 1 1 1 32
   
10  2f m 10 15 10  2f m 30
10+ 2fm = 30  fm = 10 cm
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 69
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

44. (d)
I  aperture2
I1  d2/ 4  I2  (d2 /4 – (d/4)2
d 2  1  3 d 2
I2  1    I2  
4  4 4 4
I2 3 3
  I2= I1
I1 4 4

45. (b)

O, I

So, object is placed at focus of convex lens.

46. (d)

m

53o
i
37o

Graph between angle of incidence and deviation is un-symmetrical with respect to angle of incidence
and slope decreases after minimum deviation. Keeping above facts in mind option (D) is correct
choice.

47. (b)
i =42 o  e = 62o
 = (i + e) – A  44o = (42 o + 62 o) – A
A = 60 o  m = 2i – A
 A 38o  60o
i= m  i=  i = 49o
2 2

48. (c)
 = ( – 1) A
 = (1.5 – 1)  10 I 
= 5o
 d

= 5
180 O 
10 cm

=
36
d  d 5 screen
 = tan   =  d= cm
10 36 10 18
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 70
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

49. (c)
Because wave length and direction of progation changes.

50. (b)
nR   n  1 V
D D
n R    n  1  V
d d
o o
n  7800 A = (n + 1)  5200 A
6n = 4 (n + 1)
6n = 4n + 4
2n = 4
n=2

51. (d)
Path difference = (l1 + l3) – (l2 + l4)
for destructive interference
Path difference = (2n + 1) /2
from (1) and (2)
(l1 + l3) – (l2 + l4) = (2n + 1) /2

52. (b)
I max 41 2
 0 
I1  I 2 210 1

53. (c)
Imax  410
I  410
I
I0 
4

54. (c)
Initially phase difference is 2, with increasing distance of screen phase difference decreases to 
and than to zero.

55. (d)

2d d d/2
OO   2d/3 2d/3 O
3 2
4d  3d d x
= O
6
d
OO 
6
d
x=
6

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 71
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

56. (a)

Since S1O = S2O n3

S1
n t n t n2
Path diff. = 3  2
n1 n1 h1
O
n t  n2t
Path diff. = 3
n1
1 S2
 n  n2  t
Path diff. = 3
n1
2  Path diff . 2  n 3  n 2  t
Path diff. =  Path diff. =
1 n11

57. (b)
Path diff. = (S2P – 2t + .2t) – [(S1P – t) + 2t] S1 t, 2
Path diff = (S2P – S1P) – t
P
yd y
Path diff. = t 
D 
O
Since central maximum is at point P
yd tD
t= 0  y=
D d S2
, 2t
58. (a)
If I is the polarizing angle, n = tan I (Brewester’s law)
1
n  tan 670 is greater than 2. We also know n
sin C
1
sin C , where C is the critical angle, sin C is less than 0.5
n
Hence C is less than 300 . The only possible answer is 22 0

59. (d)
1
If I is the intensity of the incident unpolarised light, the intensity transmitted by the first is
.
2
This is the intensity of incident light on the second polaroid. Intensity transmitted by the second
1
Polaroid is   cos 2  , where  is the angle between the axes.
2
3 4
Here sin   , cos  is therefore ,
5 5
2
1 1 4 8
cos 2       I
2 2 5 25
8
is the required ratio.
25

60. (c)
1 1 3 31
cos2 30     0.3751
2 2 4 8

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 72
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (a, c)
yb
x 
d
b
.b
b2
x  2 =
d 2d

If certain wavelength are missing then they are making minima.

 1
x   n    for minima
 2
2
b 3 b2
n = 1,  , 
2d 2 3d
b2  b2
n = 0,  , 
2d 2 d
2. (a, b & d)
hi v h u
1
 , i  , u + v = 96
2
… (1)
h0 u h0 v

3. (a, b, c)
I max (a 1  a 2 ) 2 2 2
 2
a1  1  a0
I min (a 1  a 2 ) 3 3
I
a 2  I  a0  max  25
I min
If an identical paper is pasted across second slit shifted C.B.F. will back in central point.
tD
shift     1
d
nD
fringe width 
d
shift (  1)t
 n   15 .
fringe width 

4. as object is at 2f distance.
x  40
y  1
z  1

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 73
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

D 2
5. 2 
d
D1
1   2  21
d

o
6. (a) angle may be 90
(b) sin i   2  1 sin A  cos A
sin i  cos A   2  i sin A
sin 2 i  cos 2 A  2 sin i cos A    2  1 sin 2 A
A

i A

1  sin 2 ˆi  2 sin iCBA   2 sin 2 A

sin i   sin A  1  sin 2 i  2sin iCBA  sin 2 i  1  2sin i ln A  0 not possible.
o
(c) if i  90
r1  C
r2  A  C
So, from Snell’s law
 sin r2  sin e
 sin r2  sin e
 sin  A  C   sin c possible.
(d) i  r (i = r condition for min. deviation)

7.

d 2f 2
f1

F1  d  2f2  d  f1  2 f 2
Option (a) & (b) true.

8. B, C

9. O & I1 both are virtual object.

I1 & I2 Real image.

1 1 1
10.   
v 10 f
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 74
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

1 1 1
 
v 40 f
5 2
Add   f  16
40 f
v  80 / 3

11. Hologram image looks different in diff. direction.

f0
12. 20  f 0  fe  42
fe
fe  2
f 0  40
Length decreases for least distance of clear vision.
Df  D 
ve   f
D  f  D  f 
ve  f
  v 0  ve
f 0  ve
  f0  fe
13.

14. (c)
N

2  1

1  0.4
i

for T.I.R.  1.4  sin C = 1  sin 90 o

1 5
sin C =  sin C = = .7
1.4 7
sin i = .8  i > C so T.I.R. will happen

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 75
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

15. (b, c, d)

1 i

i 2

90 - i

(2)

3

For T.I.R. at interface of 1 & 2

I > C1  sin i > sin C1 ............ (1)
sin i > sin C1
Taking refraction at interface of 1 & 2

1 sin C1 = 2 sin 90o  sin C1 = 2 ............ (2)
1
Form (1) and (2)

sin i > 2
1
For T.I.R. at interface of 2 & 3 90o – i > C2
sin (90 o – i) > sin C2  cos i > sin C2 ............ (3)
Taking refraction at interface of 2 & 3

1 sin C2 = 3 sin 90o  sin C2 = 2 ............ (4)
1
From (3) & (4)
 
cos i > 3  1  sin 2 i > 3
1 1
 22  32
1 
12 12
12   22  32 and 12  32   22
Obviously 12   22  33

16. (a, c)
 = ( – 1) A

17. (b, c, d)
(b) At minimum deviation r1 = r2 = A/2 so, ray passes parallel to base through prism.
(c) For max

e i c 90o
90o c

(d)  = ( – 1) A

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 76
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

19. (b, c)

20. (b)
D

d

21. (c, d) 22. (a, c, d) 23. (a, b, d) 24. (b, d)

25. (a, d)

When light reflected from denser medium it’s path difference is increase by
2
INTEGER TYPE

1  1 
1.  
v  R

1  1
 2
10 10
2 1 2  1
 
v u R
2 1 2  1
   v  20
v  10
1 2 2
For parallel surface  
v 10 
v5
y5

.4  300  109 .4  500  109

2. 1   2 
2 103 2 103
 68 105  10 105
 2n1  1 3   2n 2  1 
2  2n1  1 3   2n 2  1 5
2 2
6n1  3  10n 2  5 6n1  10n 2  2
3n1  5n 2  1
n1  2, n 2  1 also n1  7, n 2  4

62
  32  30  105
2
4
= 310
3. f0  100
fe  5
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 77
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

25  5 25
v0  2m ve  =
30 6
v0  2m ve  25
m=6

I0 I
4. I1  I2  0 cos2 t
2 2
I
I3  0 cos2 3t cos2 t
2
I0
I4  cos2 t cos2 3t cos2  90  2t 
2
96 1 3
 1   9
2 4 4

5. 3I0  I0  I0  2I0 cos 

1 25
cos       2 4    
2 3 3
25   25 
 2.4  2.1 t   
3 2 6
25 3 25 
t  106   05
1.8 5 1.8

SUBJECTIVE

1. (i) C = (y –1) A

1.51  1.49  o
=   1 6 C
 2 
o
C = 3 (ACW) 1.5o
F   y  1 A   CW 
 1.77  1.73  F
=  1 A
 2 
= (1.75 – 1) A
F  0.75A  C.W   net  C  SF (ACW)
1.5 = 3 – 0.75 A  0.75 A = 1.5  A = 2 o

(ii)  V  ( y  1)A  (y  1)A  V

o
 V  (1.51  1)6 ACW  (1.77  1) 2CW R d2
l d1
 (3.06  1.54) ACW  2
V  1.52 ACW
D
 g  ( g  1)ACW  (R  1)ACW
 [(1.49  1)6o  (1.73  1)2o ]
= [2.94 – 1.46] ACW
= 1.48 ACW

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 78
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

d2
 tan V
D
d1
 tan R  d 2  d1  D(V   R )
D

d2 – d1 = 2 (1.52 – 1.48) m  d 2 – d1 = 2  .04  m
180
4
Ans. mm
9

2
I m ax

 I I
1 2
100I 20I B 12.8I B
2
I min
2.  I I
1 2
A
2 3.2I

=
 20  12.8  80I 16I
2
 20  12.8 
20  12.8  2 20  12.6
= 64I
20  12.6  2 20 12.6

32.8  32 I 64.8 I 648

=  m ax   m ax 
32.6  32 I min 0.8 I min 8
I m ax 81

I min 1


3. Path difference =
2

21t 
2
o

 4800 A
t  t 3
41 4 1.2 
o 2
1
t = 1000 A  t = 10–7 m
1   2   3
4. Intensity at P
I(R) = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos 
since, I1 = I2 = I0
I(R) = 2I0 (1 + cos )
Intensity at P before insertion of transparent sheet ...... (1)
Imax = 4I0
and after insertion of transparent sheet
3 3
I(R) = Imax  I(R) = 4I0
4 4
I(R) = 3I0 ...... (2)
from (1) and (2)
3I0 = 2I0 (1 + cos )

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 79
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

3 1
(1 + cos ) =  cos  =
2 2
Since point P lies between 5th bright and 5th dark so phase difference  must lies between 10  &
11.
Therefore
1   31
cos  = or  =  10    
2  3 3
31 
equivalent path difference =  ...... (3)
3 3
path difference at P = (S2P – t + 2t) – (S1P – t + 1t)
(S2P – S1P) + (2 –1)t ...... (1)
Since S2P – S1P, so
Path difference at P = (2 –1)t ...... (4)
From (3) and (4)
31 
(2 –1)t = 
3 3
31
t=
12( 2  1 )
31 5400 1010
t= m
6(1.7  1.4)
t = 9.3 m

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 80
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ELECTROSTATICS & CAPACITORS, CURRENT ELECTRICITY

ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS

CONCEPTS SUMMARY

1. Electric and magnetic forces determine the properties of atoms, molecules and bulk matter.

2. From simple experiments on frictional electricity, one can infer that there are two types of charges in
nature; and that like charges repel and unlike charges attract. By convention, the charge on a glass
rod rubbed with silk is positive; that on a plastic rod rubbed with fur is then negative.

3. Conductors allow movement of electric charge through them, insulators do not. In metals, the mobile
charges are electrons; in electrolytes both positive and negative ions are mobile.

4. Electric charge has three basic properties: quantization, additivity and conservation.
Quantisation of electric charge means that total charge (q) of a body is always an integral multiple of
a basic quantum of charge (e) i.e. q = n e. where n = 0, ±1, ±2, ±3, ….Proton and electron have
charges +e, –e, respectively. For macroscopic charges for which n is a very large number,
quantisation of charge can be ignored.
Additivity of electric charges means that the total charge of a system is the algebraic sum (i.e., the
sum taking into account proper signs) of all individual charges in the system.
Conservation of electric charges means that the total charge of an isolated system remains unchanged
with time. This means that when bodies are charged through friction, there is a transfer of electric
charge from one body to another, but no creation or destruction of charge.

5. Coulomb’s Law: The mutual electrostatic force between two point charges q1 and q2 is proportional
to the product q1q2 and inversely proportional to the square of the distance r21 separating them.
Mathematically,
k qq
F21  force on q 2 due to q1   21 2  r 21
r21
1
Where r 21 is a unit vector in the direction from q1 to q2 and k  is the constant of proportionality.
40
In SI units, the unit of charge is coulomb. The experimental value of the constant 0 , is
0  8.854 1012 C2 N1 m2
The approximate value of k is
k  9 109 N m2 C2

6. The ratio of electric force and gravitational force between a proton and an electron is
ke2
 2.4  1039
G me mp

7. Superposition Principle: The principle is based on the property that the forces with which two
charges attract or repel each other are not affected by the presence of a third (or more) additional
charge(s). For an assembly of charges q1, q2, q3,… the force on any charge. say q 1, is the vector sum
of the force on q 1 due to q2, the force on q 1 due to q 3 and so on. For each pair, the force is given by
the Coulomb’s law for two charges stated earlier.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 81
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. The electric field E at a point due to a charge configuration is the force on a small positive test charge
q placed at the point divided by the magnitude of the charge. Electric field due to a point charge q has
a magnitude q / 40 r 2 ; it is radially outwards from q, if q is positive and radially inwards if q is
negative. Like Coulomb force, electric field also satisfies superposition principle.

9. An electric field line is a curve drawn in such a way that the tangent at each point on the curve gives
the direction of electric field at that point. The relative closeness of field lines indicates the relative
strength of electric field at different points: they crowd near each other in regions of strong electric
field and are far apart where the electric field is weak. In regions of constant electric field, the field
lines are uniformly spaced parallel straight lines.

10. Some of the important properties of field lines are: (i) Field lines are continuous curves without any
breaks. (ii) Two field lines cannot cross each other. (iii) Electrostatic field lines start at positive
charges and end at negative charges — they cannot form closed loops.

11. An electric dipole is a pair of equal and opposite charges q and – q separated by some distance 2a. Its
dipole moment vector p has magnitude 2qa and is in the direction of the dipole axis from – q to q.

12. Field of an electric dipole in its equatorial plane (i.e., the plane perpendicular to its axis and passing
through Its centre) at a distance r from the centre:
p 1
E
4 0  a  r 2 3/ 2
2

p
 , for r  a
4  0 r 3
Dipole electric field on the axis at a distance r from the centre:
2p r
E 2
4 0  r 2  a 2 
2p
 for r  a
40 r 3
The 1/r3 dependence of dipole electric fields should be noted in contrast to the 1/r2 dependence of
electric field due to a point charge,

13. In a uniform electric field E. a dipole experiences a torque  given by

  pE
but experiences no net force.

14. The flux  of electric field E through a small area element S is given by
  E.S
The vector area element  S is
S  Snˆ
where  S is the magnitude of the area element and n̂ is normal to the area element, which can be
considered planar for sufficiently small  S .
For an area element of a closed surface, n̂ is taken to be the direction of outward normal, by
convention.

15. Gauss’s Law: The flux of electric field through any closed surface S is 1/ 0 times the total charge
enclosed by S. The law is especially useful in determining electric field E. when the source
distribution has simple symmetry:
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 82
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

(1) Thin infinitely long straight wire of uniform linear charge density 

E nˆ
2 0 r
where r is the perpendicular distance of the point from the wire and n̂ is the radial unit vector in the
plane normal to the wire passing through the point.
(ii) Infinite thin plane sheet of uniform surface charge density 

E nˆ
2 0
Where n̂ is a unit vector normal to the plane, outward on either side,
(iii) Thin spherical shell of uniform surface charge density 
q
E r̂ (r  R )
40 r 2
E0 (r < R)
where r is the distance of the point from the centre of the shell and R the radius of the shell. q is the
total charge of the shell: q  4R 2 . The electric field outside the shell is as though the total charge
is concentrated at the centre. The same result is true for a solid sphere of uniform volume charge
density. The field is zero at all points inside the shell

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

CONCEPTS SUMMARY
1. Electrostatic force is a conservative force. Work done by an external force (equal and opposite to the
electrostatic force) in bringing a charge q from a point R to a point P is VP  VR , which is the
difference in potential energy of charge q between the final and Initial points.

2. Potential at a point is the work done per unit charge (by an external agency) in bringing a charge from
infinity to that point. Potential at a point is arbitrary to within an additive constant, since it is the
potential difference between two points which Is physically significant. If potential at infinity is
chosen to be zero: potential at a point with position vector r due to a point charge Q placed at the
origin is given is given by
1 Q
V r  
4  0 r

3. The electrostatic potential at a point with position vector r due to a point dipole of dipole moment p
placed at the origin is
1 p.rˆ
V r 
4 0 r 2
The result is true also for a dipole (with charges – q and q separated by 2a) for r >> a.

4. For a charge configuration q 1. q2,..., q n with position vectors r1, r2,…. rn , the potential at a point P is
given by the superposition principle
1  q1 q 2 q 
V    ...  n 
4  0  r1P r2P rnP 
where r1P is the distance between q1 and P. as and so on.

5. An equipotential surface is a surface over which potential has a constant value. For a point charge,
concentric spheres centered at a location of the charge are equipotential surfaces. The electric field E
at a point is perpendicular to the equipotential surface through the point. E is in the direction of the
steepest decrease of potential.
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 83
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

6. Potential energy stored in a system of charges is the work done (by an external agency) in
assembling the charges at their locations. Potential energy of two charges q 1, q 2 at r1. r2 is given by
1 q1q 2
U
4 0 r12
where r12 is distance between q1 and q2.

7. The potential energy of a charge q in an external potential V(r) is qV(r). The potential energy of a
dipole moment p in a uniform electric field E is - p.E.

8. Electrostatics field E is zero in the interior of a conductor; just outside the surface of a charged

conductor, E is normal to the surface given by E  n̂ where n̂ is the unit vector along the outward
0
normal to the surface and  is the surface charge density. Charges in a conductor can reside only at
its surface. Potential is constant within and on the surface of a conductor. In a cavity within a
conductor (with no charges), the electric field is zero.

9. A capacitor is a system of two conductors separated by an insulator. Its capacitance is defined by

C = Q/V. where Q and – Q are the charges on the two conductors and V is the potential difference
between them. C is determined purely geometrically, by the shapes, sizes and relative positions of
the two conductors. The unit of capacitance is farad:, 1 F = 1 C V-1. For a parallel plate capacitor
(with vacuum between the plates),
A
C  0
d
where A is the area of each plate and d the separation between them.

10. If the medium between the plates of a capacitor is filled with an insulating substance (dielectric) the
electric field due to the charged plates induces a net dipole moment in the dielectric. This effect,
called polarisation, gives rise to a field in the opposite direction, The net electric field inside the
dielectric and hence the potential difference between the plates is thus reduced. Consequently, the
capacitance C increases from its value C0 when there is no medium (vacuum), C  K C0
where K is the dielectric constant of the insulating substance.

11. For capacitors in the series combination, the total capacitance C is given by
1 1 1 1
    ...
C C1 C 2 C3
In the parallel combination, the total capacitance C is:
C  C1  C2  C3  ...
where C1 ,C2 ,C3 ... are individual capacitances.

12. The energy U stored in a capacitor of capacitance C. with charge Q and voltage V is
1 1 2 1 Q2
U  QV  CV 
2 2 2 C
The electric energy density (energy per unit volume) in a region with electric field is 1/ 2  0 E 2 .

13. A Van de Graaff generator consists of a large spherical conducting shell (a few metre in diameter).
By means of a moving belt and suitable brushes, charge is continuously transferred to the shell and
potential difference of the order of several million volts is built up, which can be used for accelerating
charged particles.
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 84
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ELECTROSTATICS
FORMULA SUMMARY

 Coulomb’s Law :
 q1 q 2
F1,2  r̂1, 2
4  0 r 2
F1, 2 : force by q l on q 2 in vacuum
r̂1, 2 : unit vector from q 1 to q 2
Note:
(1) Charge is conserved in every process.
(2) In electrostatics & magneto statics, Newton’s law are valid
( e.g. Newton’s 3rd law is obeyed in coulombic force ). But, in electrodynamics momentum is stored
in the fields also. So, “simple” conservation of momentum doesn’t hold

 For a conductor

(1) Charge resides on outer surface

(2) Electric field inside the metal part is zero
(3) Field inside a cavity is uniform.
(4) Field lines emerging out of it or going into it are normal to surface
(5) Interior of conductor is equipotential.

A conductor has a cavity in which a charge +q is placed. Net charge –q is induced on the inner
surface of cavity & +q charge is induced on the outer surface of conductor



 q 



for a non – uniform conductor the surface charge density ( ) varies inversely as radius of curvature
1
(R) of that part of conductor.  
R

 Electric Field lines :

(1) Never intersect
(2) Start at positive charge & end at negative charge
(3) Are perpendicular to equipotential surfaces

 Gauss’ Law :
 q nc
 K E .ds 
0

r ds
p ds Solid angle is defined as w 
r2
Note :
(1) Gauss’ law is very useful in symmetric situation
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 85
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

(2) The electric field

 is due to all charges whether inside or outside.
Relation between E and V ;
r
 x y z   v v v 
V = -  E . dr   E x dx   E y dy   E z dz E    î  ĵ  k̂ 
     x y z 
 v 1 v ˆ
=   r̂  
 r r  

System Potential (w. r. t. V = 0 at  ) Electric Field

1 Isolated charge q q
4 0 r 40r 2
2 Dipole E 1 p cos  p
 E ( 2 cos  r̂  sin  ˆ )
4 0 r2 4 0 r 3
r P  p
E  3
(3 cos 2   1) 1 / 2
 4 0 r
-q +q
1
tan  = tan 
2
3 Ring 1 q 1 qx
Radius :R 4 0 R  x22 4 0 (R  x 2 ) 3 / 2
2

At a dist x

4 Disc 
( R 2  x 2  x)   R 2  x 2  x 
R
2 0
x 2 0  R 2  x 2 

At edge R
 0
5 Infinite sheet of x 
 w.r.t V = 0 at x = 0
charge 2 0 2 0
6 Finite line of charge  sec   tan 
j V ln 
i
4 0 sec   tan 
4 0 x
 
(sin   sin )î  (cos   cos ) ĵ

 For infinite & semi infinite line

 use this with proper  & 
x
7 Charged q E=0 , 0  r < R
Spherical shell V ,r  R
4 0 R q
 ,r  R
q 4 0r 2
V ,r R
40r
8 Solid Sphere q qr
V (1.5R 2  0.5 r 2 ) E ,0  r  R
4 0 R 3 4  0 R 3
0rR q
= ,r  R
q 40 r 2
V= ,r R
4 0 r

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 86
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Note: (1) Above formulae can be used in gravitation by replacing q by m ,

1
by G, attaching a negative sign to V & reversing direction of E,.
4 0

(2) For a metallic Solid charged sphere Ein =0

(3) Electric Dipole

 
  p E 
  E is uniform
u   p .E
In a non uniform electric field
 
 E E
F P where is along direction of dipole
 
6P1P2
force between two parallel dipoles ( P1 , P2 ) placed far apart =
4  0 r 4
kq 1q 2
potential energy =
r
3 Q2
(4) Self energy of uniformly charged sphere  K
5 R
2
1 Q
Self energy of charged metallic sphere = K
2 R

CAPACITORS

K 0 A
(1) Parallel plate capacitor C 
d
If slabs of dielectric constant K1, K2 ,…& thickness t1 ,t2 are placed between two plates ,
then capacitance
0 A
C
  n   n t i 
d    t i     
  i1   i 1 k i 

if placed parallel then C = ( K1 A1 + K2A2 + … ) 0
d
(2) Spherical capacitor
b
40 ab
a C
ba

b
a 4 0 b 2
C
ba

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 87
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

2 0 
(3) Cylindrical capacitor C
b
n  
a
 1
Bound charge on surface of dielectric of a capacitor   0 1  
 K
1 2
(Force of attraction between plates per unit area) =  0 E 2 =
2 2 0
1 1
Energy stored = CV 2 Energy density =  0 E 2
2 2
1) (i) In series combination of capacitor :
1 1 1
V1 : V2 : V3 = : :
C1 C 2 C3
In parallel combination :
q1 : q2 : q 3 = C1 : C2 : C3

(ii) If n plates are arranged with alternate plates joined and between any two consecutive plates
A 0 A 0
C= then Ceq = ( n – 1 )
d d
(iii) When a parallel plate capacitor is dipped in liquid, with lower plate inside , then the rise in liquid
( K  1)Q 2
level , h =
2 A2 K  0  g
(iv) when two condensers C1 and C2, charged to potential V1 and V2 are joined by conducting wire, then
C V  C 2 V2
final potential V = 1 1
C1  C 2
 C1 
final charge distribution , Q1 =   C1V1  C 2 V2 
 C1  C 2 
 C2 
Q2 =   C1V1  C 2 V2 
 C1  C 2 
1  C1 C 2 
Loss of energy =   V1  V2  2
2  C1  C 2 

Note : Above formulae are valid for parallel plate capacitor with positive plates joined and negative plates
joined too. If positive plate connected to negative then replace V2 by – V2.
1 dC
Force on the dielectric in a capacitor  V 2 (It is due to fringing effect)
2 dx
Rt = R0 ( 1 +  t ),  is the temperature coefficient of resistance

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 88
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CONCEPT SUMMARY

1. Current through a given area of a conductor is the net charge passing per unit time through the area.

2. To maintain a steady current, we must have a closed circuit in which an external agency moves
electric charge from lower to higher potential energy. The work done per unit charge by the source in
taking the charge from lower to higher potential energy (i.e., from one terminal of the source to the
other) is called the electromotive force, or emf, of the source. Note that the emf is not a force; it is the
voltage difference between the two terminals of a source in open circuit.

3. Ohm’s law: The electric current I flowing through a substance is proportional to the voltage V across
its ends. i.e., V  I or V = RI, where R is called the resistance of the substance. The unit of
resistance is ohm: 1  1V A 1

4. The resistance R of a conductor depends on its length l and constant cross-sectional area A through
the relation.

R
A
where  , called resistivity is a property of the material and depends on temperature and pressure.

5. Electrical resistivity of substances varies over a very wide range. Metals have low resistivity, in the
range of 108  m to 106  m. Insulators like glass and rubber have 10 22 to 10 24 times greater
resistivity. Semiconductors like Si and Ge lie roughly in the middle range of resistivity on a
logarithmic scale.

6. In most substances, the carriers of current are electrons; in some cases, for example, ionic crystals and
electrolytic liquids, positive and negative ions carry the electric current.

7. Current density j gives the amount of charge flowing per second per unit area normal to the flow,
j  nqvd
where n is the number density (number per unit volume) of charge carriers each of charge q. and vd
is the drift velocity of the charge carriers. For electrons q = - e. If j is normal to a cross-sectional area
A and is constant over the area, the magnitude of the current I through the area is nevd A .

8. Using E  V / l, I  nevd A . and Ohm’s law, one obtains

eE ne2
 vd
m m
The proportionality between the force eE on the electrons in a metal due to the external field E and
the drift velocity vd (not acceleration) can be understood, if we assume that the electrons suffer
collisions with ions in the metal, which deflect them randomly. If such collisions occur on an average
at a time interval  ,
vd  a  eE / m
m
where a is the acceleration of the electron. This gives  
ne2 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 89
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

9. In the temperature range in which resistivity increases linearly with temperature, the temperature
coefficient of resistivity a is defined as the fractional increase In resistivity per unit increase in
temperature.

10. Ohm’s law is obeyed by many substances, but it is not a fundamental law of nature. It fails if
(a) V depends on I non-linearly.
(b) the relation between V and I depends on the sign of V for the same absolute value of V.
(c) The relation between V and I is non-unique.
An example of (a) is when  increases with I (even if temperature is kept fixed). A rectifier combines
features (a) and (b). Ga As shows the feature (c).

11. When a source of emf  is connected to an external resistance R, the voltage Vext across R is given by

Vext  IR  R
R r
where r is the internal resistance of the source.

12. (a) Total resistance R of n resistors connected In series is given by R  R1  R 2  ...  R n

1 1 1 1
(b) Total resistance R of it resistors connected in parallel is given by    .... 
R R1 R 2 Rn

13. Kirchhoff’s Rules –

(a) Junction Rule: At any Junction of circuit elements, the sum of currents entering the junction must
equal the sum of currents leaving it.
(b) Loop Rule: The algebraic sum of changes in potential around any closed loop must be zero.

14. The Wheatstone bridge is an arrangement of four resistances. – R1, R2, R3, R4 as shown in the text.
The null-point condition is given by
R1 R 3

R2 R 4
using which the value of one resistance can be determined, knowing the other three resistances.

15. The potentiometer is a device to compare potential differences. Since the method involves a condition
of no current flow, the device can be used to measure potential difference; internal resistance of a cell
and compare emf’s of two sources.

CURRENT ELECTRICITY

FORMULA SUMMARY

   
(1) E  J J : Current density ; E : Electric field
i = nAe Vd
m
 2
ne 
 eE 
v d   
m
Vd
mobility  =
E
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 90
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

for resistance in series V1 : V2 : V3 = R1 : R2 : R3

1 1 1
in parallel combination i1 : i2 : i3 = : :
R1 R 2 R 3

(2) Resistance R 
A
(3) Wheat stone bridge : If PS =QR ig =0

P Q

R S

(4) Grouping of cells

R1 E1

R2 E2

Rn En
n
 Ei 
  R
i 1 

i 
E net  n where Ei are taken with sign as required
1
i 1 R i

(5) Kirchoff’s current law i  0 at junction ( charge conservation )

Kirchoff’s voltages law  V  0 in a closed loop ( energy conservation)
(i) power transferred to the load by the cell is maximum when internal
resistance = external resistance
(ii) in mixed grouping of cells containing m rows of n cells each :
nr
Req = , Eeq = nE.
m
(iii) If a conducting wire is connected across any element ( R , L , C ) then remove the element and
solve circuit

(iv) To find Req , resolve all series , parallel combination and wheat stone bridge. If still circuit is
not solvable, connect battery and use KCL , KVL.

(v) look for equipotential points in circuit and join them.

(vi) If no current exchange takes place across a junction you can break it

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 91
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

i1 i1 i1
i1
i2
i2 i2 i2
(vii) Projectile motion based question in capacitor electric field can be solved using effective
qE
gravity as .
m
(6) Moving coil galvanometer:

K  NiAB
K  Torsional couple perunit twist
N : No of turns of coil
 : deflection in radians
A:Area of cross –section of coil
B: Magnetic field

Use of galvanometer as S
(i) Ammeter
Ig G
S
I  Ig G
I Ig

(ii) Voltmeter
V G
R G
IG Ig R

V
for conversion of ammeter to voltmeter R = A
IA

(7) Delta –Star Transformations A A

R BR c ra
ra  , etc
RA  RB  Rc Rc RB

rc
ra rb  rbrc  rc ra
RA  etc B C B rb C
ra RA

Interchange for capacitances:

i.e. Ca =
 C A C B , etc . C  C b C c
A
CA  Ca

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 92
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Find the equivalent resistance between A and B of the given circuit :

A

1

2

2
2
1

(A) 2  (B) 4  (C) 1   (D)none of these

2. A hollow sphere of radius 2R is charged to V volts and another smaller sphere of radius R is
charged to V/2 volts. Now the smaller sphere is placed inside the bigger sphere without changing
the net charge on each sphere. The potential difference between the two spheres would be :
3V V V
(A) (B) (C) (D) V
2 4 2

3. A point charge q is placed at a distance r from the centre O of a uncharged spherical shell of
inner radius R and outer radius 2R. The distance r < R. The electric potential at the centre of the
shell will be :
Conductor

+q r
O
R

2R
q 1 1  q q 1 1 
(A)    (B) (C)    (D) none of the above
4 0  r 2R  4 0 r 4 0  r 2R 
4. A solid conducting sphere of radius a has a net positive charge 2Q. A conducting spherical shell of
inner radius b and outer radius c is concentric with the solid sphere and has a net charge – Q. The
surface charge density on the inner and outer surfaces of the spherical shell will be

a
b

2Q Q Q Q Q
(A)  , (B)  , (C) 0, (D) None of the above.
4 b 4 c 2
2
4 b 4 c 2
2
4 c2

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 93
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

5. A particle of charge q = +200µc and mass m = 5kg is released from rest from the position x1 = +5m in
gravity free space. An electric field is present in this space which varies linearly with x according to

the relation E  2  10 4 8  x iˆ V/m , where x is in meter. Select the wrong statement
(A) Acceleration of the particle is 2.4 m/s2 just after the release
(B) Speed of the particle is maximum at x = +8 m
(C) Motion of the particle is oscillatory and periodic but not SHM
(D) Particle again comes to rest at x = +11 m

6. Consider a square based pyramid. Length of one side of the base is l. A positive point change q is
l
placed outside the pyramid on its line of symmetry at a distance from its base. Magnitude of
2
electric flux associated with one of the slanted faces of the pyramid is
q 5q q 3q
(A) (B) (C) (D)
24 0 24 0 4 0 4 0

7. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to a battery and is charged to potential

difference V. Another capacitor of capacitance 2C is similarly charged to a potential difference 2V.
The charging battery is then disconnected and the capacitors are connected in parallel to each other in
such a way that the positive terminal of one is connected to the negative terminal of the other. The
final energy of the configuration is
3 25 9
(A) zero (B) CV 2 (C) CV2 (D) CV 2
2 6 2

8. X and Y are large, parallel conducting plates close to each other. Each
face has an area A. X is given a charge Q. Y is without any charge.
Points A, B and C are as shown in the figure.
Q
(a) The field at B is
2 o A
Q
(b) The field at B is
o A
(c) The fields at A is minimum in magnitude
(d) The field at A and C are of the same magnitude and direction

9. The flow of charge through switch S when it is closed is

2 F
+ 
q

q q
+  S + 
6 F 3 F

(a) zero (b) q/4 (c) 2q/3 (d) q/3

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 94
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

10. A cavity of radius r is made inside a solid sphere. The volume charge density of the remaining sphere
is  . An electron (charge e, mass m) is released inside the cavity from point P as shown in figure.
The centre of sphere and centre of cavity are separated by a distance a. The time after which the
electron again touches the sphere is

P 45o

6 2r 0 m 2r 0 m 6r 0 m r0 m

(A) (B) (C) (D)
e a e a ea ea

11. An electric field given by E  4iˆ  3  y 2  2  ˆj passes through Gaussian cube of side 1m placed at
origin such that its three sides represents x, y and z axes. The magnitude net charge enclosed within
the cube is
(A) 40 (B) 30 (C) 50 (D) zero

12. Find the reading of the ideal ammeter connected in the given circuit. Assume that the cells have
negligible internal resistance.
10 V 4V 8V 6V

10  8 4 2 A

(A) 0.8A (B) 0.25A (C) 1.95A (D) 0.05A


13. The electric field in a region of space is given by E = 8x iˆ – 4y ĵ – 4z k̂ . The equation of lines of
force in plane z = 0 is
(a) 2x  y = 0 (b) xy = constant (c) xy2 = constant (d) x2/y = constant

14. A thin glass rod is bent into semicircle of radius r . A charge Qis uniformly distributed along the
upper half and a charge Q is uniformly distributed along the lower half, as shown in figure. The
electric field E at P, the centre of the semicircle, is
+ +
+ + A
+
+
+
+
+
O P
-
-
-
-
-
- B
--
- -

Q 2Q 4Q Q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 2 2 2 2 2
 0r  0r  0r 4  0 r 2
2

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 95
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

15. A spherical shell of radius R  1.5cm has a charge q  20 C uniformly distributed over it. The force
exerted by one half over the other half is’
(a) zero (b) 10  2 N (c) 500 N (d) 2000 N

16. Two concentric metallic shell’s of radius R and 2R, out of which the inner shell is having charge Q
and outer shell is uncharged. If they are connected with a conducting wire. Then,
(a) Q e number of electrons will flow from outer to inner shell, where e charge on an electron
KQ2
(b) amount of heat is produced in the wire
4R
KQ2
(c) amount of heat is produced in the wire
2R
(d) none of these

17. Figure shows four charges q1,q 2 ,q3,q 4 fixed in space. Then, the total flux of electric field through a
closed surface S, due to all charges q1,q2 ,q3 and q4 , is
q1 q2

q3 q4

(a) not equal to the total flux through S due to q3 and q4

(b) equal to the total flux through S due to q3 and q4

(c) zero if q1  q2  q3  q4

(d) twice the total flux through S due to q3 and q4 if q1  q2  q3  q4

18. A charge is uniformly distributed on a wire such that linear charge density is λ. Shape of the wire is
shown in the figure, straight section is semi infinitely large. C is the centre of the semicircular portion
of radius R. Considering all physical quantities in SI units, magnitude of electric field at C is:
 1 
K  
 4 o 

2K  2K  K
(A) (B) (C) (D) Zero
R R R

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 96
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

19. A network of resistances is constructed with R1 and R2 as shown in figure. The potential at the points
1, 2, 3,……, N are V1,V2,V3,....Vn respectively, each having a potential k times smaller than the
previous one. (Example V0 = kV1, V1 = kV2 ,V2 = kV3,....... )

V1 V2 V3 VN 1 N
V0 R1
R1 R1

R2 R2 R2 R2 R2

R1
Then the ratio is
R2
2
1 k 1  k  1
(A) k 2  (B) (C) k  2 (D)
k k 1 k k
20. A non-conducting ring of radius 0.5m carries a total charge of 1.111010 C distributed non-

uniformly on its circumference producing an electric field E everywhere in space. The value of the
l 0
 
line integral   E.dl (l = 0 being centre of the ring) in volts is
l 

(A) +2 (B) – 1 (C) – 2 (D) Zero

21. The sensitivity of a potentiometer can be increased by

(A) Decreasing the length of potentiometer wire
(B) Increasing the length of potentiometer wire
(C) Increasing the emf of the cell in primary circuit
(D) Decreasing the external resistance connected in primary circuit

22. A circuit is shown in the adjacent figure and switch S is closed at t=0. Find charge stored in C as a
function of ‘t’ is.

t t
     
(A) CV  1  e 3 RC  (B) CV 1  e 7 RC 
   
t t
CV    CV   
(C)  1  e 7 RC  (D) 1  e 3 RC 
3   3  
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 97
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

23. The circuit involves two ideal cells connected to a 1  F capacitor via a key K. Initially the key K is
in position 1 and the capacitor is charged fully by 2V cell. The key is then pushed to position 2. The
net heat produced in circuit in  J is

(A) 2 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 16

24. In the given circuit RB = 6  , RC =, 3  RD = 2  . The ratio of current through resistors A, B, C and D
will be in the ratio

(A) 3 : 2 : 1 : 6 (B) 6 : 3 : 2 : 1 (C) 1 : 2 : 3 : 6 (D) 6 : 1 : 2 : 3

25. An air filled parallel plate capacitor with the plate area A is connected to a battery with an emf E and
small internal resistance. One of the plates vibrates so that the distance between plates varies as
d  do  a cos t (a << d 0). The capacitor breaks down when the instantaneous current in the circuit
reaches the value I. Maximum possible amplitude of vibration a is
Ido2 Ido2 IA IA
(A) (B) (C) 2
(D)
EA o 2EA o 2 Ed o  o Edo2 o

26. Two perfect (infinitesimal) dipoles p 1 and p2 are perpendicular and lie a distance r apart. The force on
np1 p2 ˆ
dipole two due to one is k , Find n.
4 o r 4

(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 6 (D) 1

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 98
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

27. The diagram shows a uniformly charged hemisphere of radius R. It has volume charge density ρ. If
the magnitude of electric field at a point 2R distance above its center is E then what is the magnitude
of electric field at the point which is 2R below its center?

R R R R
(A) E (B) E (C)  E (D) E
6 o 12 o 6 o 24 o

28. Figure shows a simple potentiometer circuit for measuring a small e.m.f. produced by a
thermocouple. The meter wire PQ has a resistance of 5  and length 1 m. If a balance point is
obtained 0.6 m along PQ when measuring an e.m.f of 6 mV, what is the value of resistance R?

(A) 95  (B) 995  (C) 195  (D) 1995 

29. Three resistances are joined together to form a letter Y, as shown in figure. If the potentials of the
terminals A, B and C are V1 , V2 and V3 respectively, then determine the potential of the point ‘O’

2 1
 V V V  1 1 1  V V V   1 1 1 
(A)  12  22  32      (B)  1  2  3     
 R1 R2 R3   R1 R2 R3   R1 R2 R3   R1 R2 R3 
V V V  V V V 
(C)  1  2  3   R1  R2  R3  (D)  12  22  32   R12  R22  R32 
 R1 R2 R3   R1 R2 R3 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 99
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

30. Three point charges q1,q2 and q3 are taken such that when q1 and q2 are placed close together to
form a single point charge, the force on q3 at distance L from this combination is a repulsion of 2
unit in magnitude. When q2 and q3 are so combined the force on q1 at distance L is an attractive
force of magnitude 4 unit. Also q3 and q1 when combined exert an attractive force on q2 of
magnitude 18 unit at same distance L . The algebraic ratio of charges q1,q2 and q3 is
(a) 1:2:3 (b) 2: 3:4 (c) 4: 3:1 (d) 4:  3:2

31. A small block of mass m , charge  q is kept at the top of a smooth inclined plane of angle 30
placed in an elevator moving upward with an acceleration a0 . Electric field E exists between the
vertical side walls of the elevator. The time taken by the block to come to the lowest point of inclined
plane is(assuming the surface to be smooth)
a0
+ –
–
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
–
+ –
+ –
–
+ q m –
+ –
+ –h
+ –
–
+ 300 –
–

2h 2h
(a) t  (b) t 
g qE
g  a0  
m
2h 2h
(c) t  2 (d) t 
qE  2
g  a0  
3 qE  g  a 0 2   h
m m

32. Consider two identical positive charges which are fixed on the y axis, at  0,a  and  0, a  . Let a
particle having a negative charge start from the origin O from a point P  x, 0  at a large distance from
O, move along the x -axis, passes through O and moves far away from O. Let the acceleration a be
taken as positive along its direction of motion. The particle’s acceleration a is plotted against its x 
coordinate. Then a vs x curve is given by
(a) a (b) a

x
O O
x

a a

(c) x (d) x
O O

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 100
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

33. In a regular polygon of n sides, each corner is at a distance a from the centre. Identical charges of
magnitude q are placed at  n  1 corners. The field at the centre is
q q  n  q  n 1  q
(a) 2
(b)  n 1 2
(c)   (d)  
40a 40a  n  1  40a 2  n  40a 2

34. An infinite dielectric sheet having charge density  has a hole of radius R in it. An electron is
released on the axis of the hole at a distance 3 R from the centre. The speed with which crosses the
centre of the hole.

+ + + ++
+ ++
+ + + + + ++
R +
+ + ++ +
+ + +
++ + ++ + 3R
+
+
+ ++ + +

eR eR 2eR

(a) (b) (c) (d) None of these
2m0 m 0 m0

35. A line charge density  lies along the x – axis and let the surface of zero potential passes through (0,
5, 12)m. The potential at point 1, 3, 4  m is
Z

V=0
(0,5,12)

  13    13 
(a) log e   (b) loge  
20 5 20 3
  13 
(c) loge   (d) None of these
40 5

36. A point charge Q is placed at a distance r (< R) from the centre O of a uncharged spherical shell of
inner radius R and outer radius 2R. The electric potential at the centre of the shell is given by
Conductor
r +q
R O

2R

Q Q 1 1  Q Q 1 1 
(a) (b)    (c) (d)   
8 0 R 4 0  r 2R  4  0 r 40  r 2R 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 101
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

37. The potential energy of the system of two identically charged spheres as shown in the figure is equal
to (Assume the charge distribution to be uniform)

q2  1 1  1 q2 1 q2
(a)    (b) (c) (d) None of these
4 0  R r  4 0 r 4 0 r  R  r 

38. Consider a metal sphere, of radius R that is cut in two along a plane whose minimum distance from
the sphere’s centre is h. Sphere is uniformly charged by a total electric charge Q. The force necessary
to hold be two parts of the sphere together is

R
h

Q2 Q2
(a) F 
4 R 4
R2  h2  (b) F 
40 R 2
0
Q2 Q2
4 
(c) F  R  h (d) F  R2  h2 
320 R 3 32 0 R

39. Consider the charge configuration and a spherical Gaussian surface as shown in the figure. When
calculating the flux of the electric field over the spherical surface, the electric field will be due to
q2
 q1

q 2
(a) q2 (b) only the positive charges
(c) all the charges (d) q1 and q1

40. A uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius R carries uniform surface charge density of  per
unit area. It is made of two hemispherical shells, held together by pressing them with force F(see
figure). F is proportional to

F F

1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
(a) R (b) 2 R (c) (d)
0 0 0 R 0 R 2

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 102
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

41. An oil drop is found floating freely between the plates of a parallel plate condenser, the plates being
horizontal and the lower plate carrying a charge +Q. The area of each plate is A and the distance of
separation between them is D. The charge on the oil drop must be (g is the acceleration due to
gravity)
Ag  MgA AgQ MgAQ
(a) (b) 0 (c)  (d) 
QM Q D 0

42. A wire of length L is placed along x  axis with one end at the origin. The linear charge density of the
 x3 
wire varies with distance x from the origin as   0   , where 0 is a positive constant. The total
L
charge Q on the rod is
 L2  L3  L3  L4
(a) Q  0 (b) Q  0 (c) Q  0 (d) Q  0
3 3 4 5

43. Two identical metallic block resting on a frictionless horizontal surface are connected by a light
metallic spring having a spring constant k and an unstretched length L 0 . A total charge Q is slowly
3L
placed on the system, causing the spring to stretch to an equilibrium length L  0 , as shown. The
2
value of Q, assuming that all the charge resides on the blocks and assuming the blocks as point
charges is
L 0

k
m m
INITIALLY
L
k
m m
FINALLY

(a) Q  3L 0 2 0 L 0 (b) Q  2 L 0 3 0 L 0

(c) Q  3L 0 3 0 L 0 (d) Q  2L0 2 0 L0
44. Four equal positive charges, each of charge Q are arranged at the corners of a +
square of side  . A unit positive charge of mass m is placed at point P at height h +
above the centre of the square. Calculate Q, so that the charge is in equilibrium. +
3
+
3 +
0 mg  2 h 2  2 0 mg  2 l 2  2 +
(a) Q   l   (b) Q  h   + X
l  2  h  2 +
3
+
+
2 +
 mg  2 l  2
(c) Q  0  h   (d) None of these
4h  2
45. A simple pendulum has a length l, mass of bob m . The bob is given a charge q . The pendulum is
suspended between the vertical plates of charged parallel plate capacitor. If E is the field strength
between the plates, then time period T equals
l l l l
(a) 2 (b) 2 (c) 2 (d) 2
g qE qE 2
g g 2  qE 
m m g   
 m 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 103
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

46. A charge q is distributed uniformly over the volume of a insulating solid sphere of radius R . It is
enclosed by an earthed conducting spherical shell of inner radius R 1 and outer radius R 2 . The
charge on the outer surface of the shell will be

+++
+ + +++
R 1

R
+
R2

R2 R
(a)  q (b) q (c) q (d) zero
R1 R2

47. Which one of the following graphs represents the variation of electric field strength E with distance r
from the centre of a uniformly charged non-conducting sphere
(a) E (b) E

r R r
R

(c) E (d) E

48. A uniformly charged sphere of radius R  2m and volume charge density  has a spherical cavity as
shown. A point object of mass m  1kg and charge q  2 104 C is thrown, from point A. The

minimum velocity required at A for it to reach point B is   30 103 Cm 3 
Y

C1 C2 X
B

(a) 0.02ms 1 (b) 0.2 ms 1 (c) 0.4 ms1 (d) 0.04 ms1

49. The potential energy of an electric dipole in a uniform electric field is u . The magnitude of the torque
acting on the dipole due to the field is N . Then
(a) u is minimum and N is zero when the dipole is parallel to the field
(b) u is zero and N is zero when the dipole is perpendicular to the field
(c) u is minimum and N is maximum when the dipole is perpendicular to the field
(d) u is minimum and N is zero when the dipole is anti-parallel to the field

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 104
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

50. Five point charges (  q each) are placed at the five vertices of a regular hexagon of side 2 a . What is
the magnitude of the net electric field at the centre of the hexagon?
1 q q 2 q 5q
(a) 2
(b) 2
(c) (d)
4 0 a 160a 4 0 a 2 16  0 a 2

51. Two large parallel planes charged uniformly with surface charge density  and   are located as
shown in the figure. Which one of the following graphs shows the variation of electric field along a
line perpendicular to the planes as one moves from A to B?
 

E A B

(a) (b)
x
x

(c) (d)

x x
52. Initially the spheres A and B are at potentials VA and VB respectively. Now sphere B is earthed by
closing the switch. The potential of A becomes
B
A

(a) 0 (b) VA (c) VA  VB (d) VB

53. An isolated parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C has four surfaces with charges Q1 , Q2 ,Q3 and
Q 4 as shown in figure. The potential difference between the plates is

Q1 Q3

Q2 Q4

Q1  Q 2  Q3  Q 4 Q 2  Q3
(a) (b)
2C 2C
Q  Q3 Q  Q4
(c) 2 (d) 1
2C 2C
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 105
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

54. In a parallel plate capacitor, the region between the plates is filled by a dielectric slab. The capacitor
is charged by a battery and then disconnected from it. The slab is now taken out. It is observed that,
(a) the potential difference across the capacitor is reduced.
(b) the potential difference across the capacitor is increased
(c) the energy stored in the capacitor is reduced.
(d) the external agent does no work in taking the slab out

55. A dielectric slab is introduced between the plates of a capacitor in the B

A
manner as shown. Then current in outer circuit.
(a) always flows from B to A
(b) always flows from A to B
(c) first flows from B to A and then from A to B
(d) first flows from A to B and then from B to A

56. The charge acquired by C1 as shown in the figure is Q . The charge C3 C1 C2

acquired by C 2 is  C1  C2  C3  E

Q Q
(a) Q (b) (c) (d) 2Q
2 4

57. Two identical capacitor, have the same capacitance C. one of them is charged to potential V1 and the
other to V2 . The negative ends of the capacitors are connected together. When the positive ends are
also connected , the decrease in energy of the combined system is
1 1 1 1
4

(a) C V12  V2 2  
(b) C V12  V2 2
4
 (c) C  V1  V2 
4
2
(d) C  V1  V2 
4
2

58. One plate of a capacitor is connected to a spring as shown in figure. Area of both the plates is A. If
4d
steady state separation between the plates is (spring was unstretched and the distance between the
5
plates was d when the capacitor was uncharged). The force constant of the spring is approximately

0AV2 40AV 40AV2 60V2

(a) (b) (c) (d)
2d3 d2 d3 Ad3

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 106
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

59. An infinite ladder of capacitors each 1 F is made as shown in figure. The capacitance between A
and B  in F  is
B

(a) 1 (b) 1.3 (c) 1 .6 (d) 0

60. In the given arrangement of the capacitors, one 3F capacitor has got 600J of energy. Then the
potential difference across 2F capacitor
3 F
is3 F
3 F

A B

2 F 6 F
(a) 15 V (b) 30 V (c) 45 V (d) 60 V

61. Two capacitors C1 and C 2 in a circuit are joined as shown in figure. The potentials of points A and
B are V1 and V2 respectively, then the potential of point D will be

A B
V1 D V2
C1 C2

(a)  V1  V2  (b) C 2 V1  C1V2 (c) C1V1  C 2 V2 (d) C 2 V1  C1V2

 2  C1  C 2 C1  C 2 C1  C 2

62. The capacitance of two conductors are C1 and C 2 and their respectively potentials are V1 and V2 .
If they are connected by a thin wire, then the loss of energy will be
C C  V  V2  C C  V  V2 
(a) 2 1 1 (b) 1 2 1
2  C1  C2  2  C1  C 2 
2
C1C2  V  V2   C1  C2  V1  V2 
(c) (d)
2  C1  C2  C1C2

63. An infinite number of identical capacitors, each of capacitance 1F , are

connected as shown in the figure. The equivalent capacitance between A
and B is
8 capacitors
16 capacitors
1
(a) F (b) 1F (c) 2F (d) 
2 A B

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 107
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

64. Figure (A) shows two capacitors connected in series and connected by a battery. The graph (B) shows
the variation of potential as one moves from left to right on the branch containing the capacitor. Then

(a) C1  C2 (b) C1  C2
(c) C1  C2 (d) C1 and C 2 cannot be compared

65. In the circuit given below, the charge in C , on the capacitor having capacity 5F is
2 F
3 F
e d

5 F
f c
4 F
a + - b
6V
(a) 4.5 (b) 9 (c) 7 (d) 15

66. An infinite number of capacitors, having capacitances 1F,2F,4F,8F……..are connected in

series. The equivalent capacitance of the system is
(a) infinite (b) 0.25F (c) 0.5F (d) 2F

67. Separation between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is d and the area if each plate is A . When
a slab of material of dielectric constant K and thickness t   d  is introduced between the plates, its
capacitance becomes
A A 0A 0A 0 A
(a) (b) (c) (d)
 1  1  1  1
d  t 1   d  t 1   d  t 1   d  t 1  
 K  K  K  K

68. A system of three parallel plates, each of area A, are separated by distances d1 and d2 . The space
between them is filled with dielectrics of permittivity 1 and 2 . The permittivity of free space is 0 .
The equivalent capacitance of the system is
1 2 A 120A 0 A 0 A
(a) (b) (c) (d)
 2d1  1d 2  1 1 2 2
 d   d 1d1   2d 2 1d 2   2d1

69. The effective capacitance of combination of equal capacitors between points A and B shown in figure
is
c c

cc c
c c B

cc c

c c
C
(a) C (b) 2 C (c) 3 C (d)
2
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 108
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

70. Consider the arrangement of three plates X,Y , and Z each of the area A and separation d . The
energy stored when the plates are fully charged is
X V
d
Y
d
Z

0 AV2 0AV2 20AV 2 3 0AV 2

(a) (b) (c) (d)
2d d d 2d

71. Find equivalent capacitance between A and B

4 F

A B

4F 4 F 4F

(a) 4F (b) 6F (c) 8F (d) 10F

72. In the circuit shown in figure, charge stored in 4F capacitor is

20 V

4 F 2 F 2 F

10V

(a) 10C (b) 20 C (c) 40 C (d) 120C

73. The charge flowing through the cell on closing the key K is equal to
K

C
C

V
CV 3CV CV
(a) (b) 4CV (c) (d)
4 4 3

74. A battery E is connected in series to an ammeter and a voltmeter such that the respective readings are
A and V. Now a resistance is joined in parallel with the voltmeter. Then
(a) A increases, V decreases (b) A decreases, V increases
(c) A and V both decreases (d) A and V both increases

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 109
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

75. A long conductor of charge q, with charge density  is moving with a velocity 2v parallel to its own
axis. The conventional current due to motion of conductor is I. Then
q
(a) I  (b) I  2 v (c) I   v (d) I  3v
t

76. An ideal battery is connected to a capacitor through a voltmeter. The reading V of the voltmeter is
plotted against time t. The V-t graph for this is given by
V V

(a) (b)

t t
V V

(c) t
(d)
t
77. In the circuit shown each battery is 5V and has an internal resistance of 0.2 . The reading of the
voltmeter is V. Then V equals

(a) 5 V (b) 10 V (c) 15 V (d) ZERO

78. In the given circuit, as the sliding contact C is moved from A to B

V

A B

A
(a) the readings of both the ammeter and the voltmeter remain constant
(b) the readings of both the ammeter and the voltmeter increase
(c) the reading of the ammeter remains constant but that of the voltmeter increases
(d) the reading of the ammeter remains constant but that of the voltmeter decreases

79. Two resistances R1 and R 2 are made of different materials. The temperature coefficient of the
material of R1 is  and that of material of R 2 is  . The resistance of the series combination of R1
R
and R 2 will not charge with temperature if 1 equals
R2
   2 2 
(a) (b) (c) (d)
   2 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 110
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

80. In the circuit shown in figure, with steady current, the potential drop across the capacitor must be
V

V R

2V 2R

V V 2V
(a) V (b) (c) (d)
2 3 3

81. A cell has an emf of 1.5 V. When short circuited, it gives a current of 3 A. The internal resistance of
the cell is
1
(a) 0.5  (b) 2.0  (c) 4.5  (d) 
4.5

82. The equivalent resistance between A and B (of the circuit shown) is
7
A
6

3
B
4
a

(a) 4.5 O
x

(b) 12  (c) 5.4  (d) 20 

83. In the network shown, the equivalent resistance between A and B is

4 3 24 17
(a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 
3 4 17 24

84. A voltmeter of range 1 V has a resistance of 1000  . To extend the range to 10 V, the additional
series resistance required is
1000
(a)  (b) 1000  (c) 9000 (d) 10000 
9
85. A primary cell has an emf of 1.5 V. When a 5  resistor is connected across it, the current is 0.2 A.
The internal resistance of the cell is
(a) 0.5  (b) 1.25  (c) 2.5  (d) 3.0 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 111
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

86. In the circuit shown, the voltmeter has a large resistance. The emf of the cell is E. The reading of the
voltmeter is
6 4

+
- E

4 6

E E E
(a) ZERO (b) (c) (d)
10 5 2

R R
87. A battery of internal resistance 4  is connected to the
network of resistances as shown. In order that the maximum
power can be delivered to the network, the value of R in  R 6R R
should be E
R 4R
4
(a) (b) 2 4
9
8
(c) (d) 18
3

88. A block of metal is made in the cuboid form with all edges of unequal length. The shortest length is
one third the longest one. If R max and Rmin are the maximum and minimum resistance between
parallel faces then,
R R R
(a) max  4 (b) max  9 (c) max  3 (d) Data Insufficient
R min R min R min

89. The circuit diagram shown consist of a large number of elements (each element has two resistors R1
1
and R 2 ). The resistances of the resistors in each subsequent element differs by a factor of k 
2
from the resistances of the resistors in the previous elements. The equivalent resistance between A
and B shown in figure is
kR1 k 2 R1 k 3R1 k 4 R1
R1
A

R2 kR 2 k 2R 2 k 3R 2 k 4R 2 

R1  R 2  R1  R 2   6R1R 2
(a) (b)
2 2
2 2
(c)
 R1  R 2   R  R  6R 1R 2
1 2
(d) None of these
2

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 112
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

90. In the circuit shown in figure, the current through

3 A 2 B 2
I
9V 8 8 4

2 D 2 C 2

(a) the 3 resistor is 0.5 A (b) the 3  resistor is 0.25 A

(c) the 4  resistor is 0.5 A (d) the 4  resistor is 0.25 A

91. In a balanced Wheatstone bridge shown, if the positions of the battery E and the galvanometer G are
interchanged, then G will show zero deflection
R1 R2

R4 R3

R1 R 2
(a) only if  (b) only if R1  R 3 and R 2  R 4 .
R3 R 4
(c) only if all the resistances are equal. (d) in all cases

92. A cell develops the same power across two resistors r1 and r2 when connected separately. If r is the
internal resistance of the cell then
1 1
(a) r  r1r2 (b) r  r1r2 (c) r   r1r2  (d) r  r1  r2
2 2

93. A uniform conductor has its two free ends joined to a cell of emf E and some non zero internal
resistance. Consider a point P right at the middle of the conductor. Let us now move away from the
midpoint of the conductor in the direction of the current and then return to P. During this process we
study the variation of the potential V at every point on the path and then plot it against the distance
covered (x). The curve that best represents the variation of V with x is
v
v
(a) (b)

E
E
x
x

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 113
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

v v
(c) (d)

<E <E

x x

94. The circuit shown here is used to compare the e.m.f.’s of the cells E1 and E 2  E1  E 2  . When the
galvanometer is connected to E1 , the null point is at C. When the galvanometer is connected to E2 ,
The null point will be

C
A B
E1
E2 G

(a) to the left of C (b) to the right of C (c) at C itself (d) no where on AB

95. In the given circuit, the ammeter A, assumed to have negligible resistance, reads 0.1 A. The value of
R is
12 V R

20 
A

50  30 

(a) 6  (b) 8  (c) 16  (d) 20 

96. A 100 W bulb B1 and two 60 W bulbs B 2 and B3 are connected to a 250 V source as shown in
figure. Now W1 , W2 and W3 are the output powers of the bulbs B1 , B2 and B3 respectively. Then
B1 B2

B3

250 V
(a) W1  W2  W3 (b) W1  W2 > W3 (c) W1 <W2  W3 (d) W1 <W2 <W3

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 114
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

97. A circuit is connected as shown in the figure with the switch S open. When the switch is closed, the
total amount of charge that flows from Y to X is
3 F 6 F
X

3 Y 6

9V

(a) ZERO (b) 54 C (c) 27 C (d) 81 C

98. In the circuit shown in figure switch S is thrown to position 1 at t = 0. When the current in the resistor
is 1 A it is then shifted to position 2. The heat generated in the circuit after shifting to position 2 is
10 V

1 5
S
2 25 F

5V
(a) zero (b) 625 J (c) 1250 J (d) none of these

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. A dielectric slab of thickness d is inserted in a parallel plate capacitor whose negative plate is at x = 0
and positive plate is at x =3d. The slab is equidistant from the plates. The capacitor is given some
charge. As x goes from 0 to 3d
(a) the magnitude of the electric field remains the same
(b) the direction of the electric field remains the same
(c) the electric potential increases continuously
(d) the electric potential increases at first, then decreases and again increases.

2. A metal sphere of radius R1 has a charge Q1. It is enclosed by a conducting spherical shell of radius
R2 that has a charge Q2.

R2

R1

Q1 -Q2

Q Q 
(a) the potential V1 of the inner surface is k  1  2 
 R1 R 2 

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 115
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 Q  Q2 
(b) the potential V2 of the outer surface is k  1 
 R2 
 1 1 
(c) the potential difference V1  V2 is kQ1   
 R1 R 2 
(d) if Q1 = 0 then V1 = V2

3. Two concentric shells have radii R and 2R charges qA and qB and potentials 2V and (3/2)V
respectively if potential at infinity is zero. Now shell B is earthed and let charges on them become
q 'A and q 'B . Then
A B

(1) qA / qB  1/ 2
(2) q 'A / q 'B  1/ 2
(3) potential of A after earthing becomes (3/2)V
(4) potential difference between A and B after earthing becomes V/2.

4. Voltmeter and ammeter shown in circuit diagram are ideal, then the correct statements are

(A) Reading of voltmeter is 4 volt. (B) Reading of ammeter is 1.0 A.

(C) Current through 1  resistance is 1.0A. (D) Current through 1  resistance is zero .

5. A thin conducting rod AB is introduced in between the two charges q 1 and q2 as shown in figure. For
this situation mark the correct statement(s)

(A) The total force experienced by q 1 is vector sum of electric force experienced by +q1 due to -q2
and due to induced charges on rod.
(B) The end A will become negatively charged

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 116
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

(C) The total magnitude of force acting on +q 1 will be greater than as compared to the case without
rod
(D) The total magnitude of force acting on -q 2 will be greater than as compared to the case without
rod

6. A thin metallic spherical shell contains a charge Q over it. A point charge +q is placed inside the shell
at point T separated from the centre by distance a. Another point charge q1 is placed outside the shell
at a distance b from the centre as shown in the adjacent figure. Now select the correct statement(s)
from the following.

(A) Electric field at the centre due to charge over outer surface of the shell is zero.
q1
(B) Electric field at the centre due to charge over outer surface of the shell is
4 ob2
1  q q Q q1 
(C) Electric potential at the centre due to all charges in space is  a  R  R  b 
4 o
1  q Q q1 
(D) Electric potential at the centre due to all charges in space is  
4 o  a R b 

7. Electric potential V due to a spherically symmetric charge system varies with distance r as shown in
Q Q
figure Given V= for r  ro and V = for r  ro which of the following statements are
4 o ro 4 o r
true?

(A) Electric field due to the charge system is discontinuous at r  ro

(B) The net charge enclosed in a sphere of radius r  2ro is Q.
(C) No charge exists at any point in a spherical region of radius r  ro .
(D) Electrostatic energy inside the sphere of radius r  ro is zero.

8. Two resistances R1   3.0  0.1  and R2   6.0  0.2  are to be joined together.
(A) The maximum resistance obtainable is  9.0  0.3 
(B) The maximum resistance obtainable is  9.0  0.2  
(C) The minimum resistance obtainable is  2.0  0.3 
(D) The minimum resistance obtainable is  2.0  0.07  

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 117
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

9. A resistor and an inductor in series are connected to a battery through a switch. After the switch is
closed (at t = 0)

L
(n 2)
(A) joule heat dissipation in the resistor changes at fastest rate at t 
R
(B) when the rate of increase of magnetic energy stored in the coil is at maximum, current in the
V 
circuit is  
 2R 
(C) power dissipated in resistor increases continuously but rate of change of power initially increases,
it later reaches a maximum, and beyond a point decreases to zero
V 
(D) the fastest increase of current takes place at I=  
 2R 

10. Two bulbs consume same power when operated at 200V and 300V respectively when the bulbs are
connected in series across a D.C source of 500V, then
(A) ratio of potential difference across them is 3/2
(B) ratio of potential difference across them is 4/9
(C) ratio of power consumed across them is 4/9
(D) ratio of power consumed across them is 2/3

11. The adjacent figure shows a resistance network with value of each resistance R. The equivalent
resistance across ‘A and B’, ‘A and C’ and ‘C and B’ are RAB, RAC and RCB respectively then

(A) RAB = RAC=RCB (B) RAB = 2RAC

(C) RAB =RCB (D) RAB =R/2

12. A short electric dipole is placed in the electric field due to a point charge. Then
(A) The dipole must experience a force (B) The dipole may experience a force
(C) The dipole must experience a torque (D) The dipole may experience a torque

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 118
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

13. In the circuit shown

(A) the current through NP is 0.5 A (B) the value of R1  40 

(C) the value of R  14 (D) the potential difference across R  49V

14. Consider two large, identical, parallel conducting plates have surfaces X and Y, facing each other.
The charge per unit area on X is 1 and charge per unit surface area on Y is 2 . Then,
(a) 1  2 , only if a charge is given to either X or Y
(b) 1  2  0 if equal charges are given to both X and Y
(c) 1  2 if X is given a charge more than that given to Y
(d) 1  2 in all cases

15. X, Y and Z are parallel plates. Y is given some positive charge. Two X Y Z
electrons A and B start with zero initial velocity from X and Z A B
respectively and reach Y in time t and T respectively.
2d d
(a) t = T (b) t  2T
(c) 2t  T (d) t = 2T

16. Two charges Q1 and Q 2 are placed at the points A and B having separation r lying inside and
outside the uncharged conducting shell. The force on Q 1 is F and that on Q 2 is f . Then
1 Q1Q2 1 Q1Q 2
(a) F  0 (b) F  (c) f  (d) f  0
40 r 2 40 r 2

17. In a parallel plate capacitor, the potential difference between the plates is V. A particle of mass m
and charge Q leaves the negative plate and reaches the positive plate at distance d in time t with a
momentum P . Then
md 2 2md 2
(a) p  mQV (b) p  2mQV (c) t  (d) t 
QV QV

B
18. Two concentric shells A and B have radii R and 2R , charges q A and q B
A
3V
and potentials 2V and respectively. Now, the shell B is earthed and the
2
new charges on them become q 'A and q'B. Then

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 119
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

qA 1
(a) 
qB 2
q 'A
(b) 1
q 'B
3V
(c) Potential difference between A and B after earthling becomes
2
V
(d) Potential difference between A and B after earthling becomes
2

19. A spherical conductor A lies inside a hollow spherical conductor B. Charges Q1 and Q 2 are given
to A and B respectively.
(a) Charge Q1 will appear on the outer surface of A.
(b) Charge Q 2 will appear on the outer surface of B .
(c) Charge Q1 will appear on the inner surface of B.
(d) Charge Q1  Q2 will appear on the outer surface of B.

20. Two identical charges each having a charge Q are fixed at a separation 2 a . A small particle P
having a charge of magnitude q placed midway between them. Now, P is given a displacement
   a  , such that it undergoes simple harmonic motion. For this, we have the following  q,  
combinations.
(a) positive , along the line joining the two identical charges.
(b)positive perpendicular to the line joining the two identical charges
(c) negative, perpendicular to the line joining the two identical charges
(d) negative, along the line joining the two identical charges

21. An electron is projected between two plates at separation d  3cm each

having length l  11cm as shown in figure, at a speed of 6 106 ms 1 at Ed
 1
an angle of 45 in a uniform field E  2000 Vm directed upwards.   4 5
The electron strikes the 
(a) upper plate (b) lower plate
(c) lower plate at the edge (d) nowhere

22. A few electric field lines for a system of two charges Q 1 and Q 2
fixed at two different points on the x  axis are shown in the figure.
These lines suggest that
(a) Q1  Q 2 (b) Q1  Q 2
(c) at a finite distance to the left of Q1 the electric field is zero
(d) at a finite distance to the right of Q 2 the electric field is zero

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 120
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

A
23. A particle of mass m and charge q is fastened to one end of a string of E
length l . The other end of the string is fixed to the point O . The whole
system lies on a frictionless horizontal plane. Initially, the mass is at rest 
at A . A uniform electric field in the direction shown is then switched
on. Then 60
O B
2qEl
(a) the speed of the particle when it reaches B is
m
qEl
(b) the speed of the particle when it reaches B is
m
(c) the tension in the string when particles reaches at B is qE
(d) the tension in the string when the particle reaches at B is 2qE

24. Consider an air filled parallel plate capacitor with one plate connected to a spring having a force
constant k and the other plate is held fixed. The system rests on frictionless table top. The plates have
charge density  and   , area A, charges Q and Q. The electrostatic force due to the electric field
created by the plate b is Fe and the spring gets an extension x . Then
k
ab
Q QE Q2 Q2
(a) Fe  (b) x  (c) x  (d) Fe 
20 k 2  0 kA 2kA0

25. In an arrangement of capacitors shown C1  C2  C3  C . The emf of the

S
battery connected in the circuit is E . When the switch S is closed, then C1

(a) some charge enters the positive terminal of the battery

(b) some charge flows out of the positive terminal of the battery C3
C2
4
(c) a charge CE flows through the battery
3 E
(d) a charge CE flows through the battery
26. Two large, parallel conducting plates are placed close to each other. The inner
surfaces of the two plates have surface charge densities  and   . The
outer surfaces are without charge. The electric field has a magnitude of


(a) in the region between the plates.
0

(b) in the region outside the plates.
0
2
(c) in the region between the plates
0
(d) zero in the region outside the plates

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 121
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

27. In the figure shown, charges on capacitors C1, C2 and C 3 are Q1,Q2 and Q 3 respectively. Then
C 2  2 F

C 1 4 F
C 3  3 F

+ -
9V

(a) Q1  20 C (b) Q2  12 C (c) Q2  8 C (d) Q3  12C

C
28. In the diagram shown, we have three large identical, parallel conducting A B

plates A,B and C placed such that the switches S1 and S2 are open initially
and they can be used to earth the plates A and C by just closing them. A d
2d
charge Q is given to the plate B . It is observed that a charge of amount
(a) Q will pass through S1 , when S1 is closed and S2 is open S1 S2

(b) Q will pass through S2 ,when S2 is closed and S1 is open

Q 2Q
(c) will pass through S1 , will pass through S2 , when S1 and S2 are closed together.
3 3
4Q Q
(d) will pass through S1 ,  will pass through S2 , when S1 and S2 are closed together.
3 3

29. In a parallel plate capacitor of plate area A, plate separation d and charge q , the force of attraction
between the plates is F.
1 1
(a) F  q 2 (b) F  d (c) F  (d) F 
d A

30. Consider a capacitor C that is charged by a battery of emf V to a potential V. The capacitor is then
disconnected from the battery and the connected again with it but now with its polarity reversed.
Then the
(a) work done by the battery is CV 2
(b) total charged that passes through battery is 2CV
(c) initial and final energy of the capacitor is same
(d) work done is by the battery is 2CV 2

31. Consider an isolated parallel plate capacitor having capacitance C . The

Q1 Q3
four surfaces of the capacitor have charges Q1 , Q2 ,Q3 and Q 4 , as
shown. If  V is the potential difference between the plates then
(a) Q 2  CV (b) Q1  Q2  CV
Q2 Q4
(c)  Q1  Q4    Q2  Q3   CV (d) Q3  CV

32. Two capacitors , C  2Fand C2  8 F are connected in series across a 300V source. Then
(a) the charges on each capacitor is 4.8 104 C (b) the potential difference across C1 is 60V
(c) the potential difference across C 2 is 240V (d) the energy stored in the system is 7.2 102 J

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 122
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

33. A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The quantities charge, voltage, electric field and
energy associated with this capacitor are given by Q0 , V0 , E 0 and u0 respectively. A dielectric slab
is now introduced to fill the space between the plates with the battery still in connection. The
corresponding quantities now given by Q,V,E n and u are related to the previous ones as
(a) Q  Q0 (b) V  V0 (c) E  E0 (d) u  u 0

34. In the given circuit, the potential difference across the 7F capacitor is
6V . Then 12 F

(a) the potential difference across the 12F capacitor is 10V

3.9 F
(b) the potential difference across the 3.9 F capacitor is 10V
7 F 3 F
(c) the charge on the 3F capacitor is 42C
(d) the emf of the battery is 30V

35. In the circuit shown, the battery is ideal and has an emf E = 2 V. The resistance of the coil of the
galvanometer G is 1 . The current that flows through the galvanometer G is I, the potential
difference across the capacitors C1 and C 2 , in steady state is V1 and V2 respectively. Then
8 C2  10F

G 2

C1  8F 10 

4V
1
(a) I = 0 (b) I  A (c) V1  1.6V (d) V2  2.4 V
5
36. A voltmeter and an ammeter having resistance R V and R A respectively are connected in series to an
ideal battery of emf E. The voltmeter reading is V, the ammeter reading is I, the potential difference
across the ammeter is VA and the total resistance of the circuit is R. Which of the following
statements(s) seem to be correct?
V E
(a) V  E (b) R V  (c) VA  E  V (d) R A  R V 
I I

37. In the circuit shown, E, F, G and H are cells of e.m.f. 2 V, 1 V, A

3 V and 1 V respectively and their internal resistance are 2 ,
F E
1  , 3  , and 1  respectively.
2 D B
(a) VD  VB   V 2
13 G H
2 C
(b) VD  VB  V
13
21
(c) VG  V  Potential difference across G.
13
19
(d) VH  V  Potential difference across H.
13

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 123
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

38. For the circuit shown in the figure

I R1
2 k

24 V 6 k R 2 R L 1.5 k

(a) the current I through the battery is 7.5 mA

(b) the potential difference across R L is 18 V
(c) ratio of powers dissipated in R1 and R 2 is 3
(d) if R1 and R 2 are interchanged, magnitude of the power dissipated in RL will decrease by a
factor of 9
R C  3F
2 3
39. In the circuit shown, the battery is ideal, with emf E 15 V 1
and it sends a current I in the circuit. All resistors are identical R
R R
and each resistor has resistance R  3. The potential 7 8
4
difference across the capacitor in steady state is VC , then
6 5
(a) I  1A (b) VC  9 V
E = 15 V
(c) VC  12V (d) I  3 A

40. A current I0 enters network the network at A and 20  C 5

leaves at B, when some potential difference is B
A
maintained across the point A and B. If RAB is the
equivalent resistance between A and B, VC and VD I0
be the potentials at the points C and D respectively and 5 D 20 
I be the current flowing through the branch CD, then
which of the following is correct?
(a) VC  VD (b) R AB  8 
3
(c) I  I 0 , from D to C (d) I  0
5
41. When the switch K is open, the equivalent resistance between A and B is 20. Which of the
following statement(s) is/are correct?

20 C R

A B
K

5 D 20
(a) R  80
(b) No current flows through K when it is closed
(c) The powers dissipated in R and in the 5 resistor are always equal
(d) The powers dissipated in the two 20 resistors are unequal
CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 124
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020
C R
42. In the circuit shown, that contains a capacitor C and a resistor R, the
capacitor C is uncharged initially. When the terminal X is joined to the
terminal Y for a long time, it is observed that a heat H1 is produced in
Y
the resistor. When the terminal X is joined to the terminal Z, again for a
long time, it is observed that a heat H 2 is produced in the resistor. Also, Z
energy supplied by the battery during the process of charging is H. Then X
H
(a) H1  H 2  (b) H1  H 2  2H
2
(c) H1  H 2  H (d) The maximum energy stored in C at any time is H1

43. In the circuit shown in figure, the switch S is closed at t = 0. S

The voltage across the capacitor C at time t after the switch S
is closed is V. The voltage as t   is V0 . E R C
E E
(a) V  1  e 3t / RC  (b) V0  R
3 3
E E
(c) V  1  e 2t / RC  (d) V0 
2 2

44. A microammeter has a resistance of 100  and a full scale range of 50 A . It can be used as a
voltmeter of as a higher range ammeter provided a resistance is added to it. Pick the correct range and
resistance combination(s).
(a) 50 V range with 10k resistance in series.
(b) 10 V range with 200k resistance in series.
(c) 5 mA range with 1 resistance in parallel.
(d) 10 mA range with 1 resistance in parallel
C R
45. In the circuit shown, when the switch is closed, the capacitor
R
charges with a time constant t1 and when the switch is opened
(after the capacitor has been charged) then the capacitor + -
discharges with a time constant t 2 . Then
t 1 t
(a) 1  (b) t1  t 2  3RC (c) 1  1 (d) t1  t 2  2RC
t2 2 t2
46. A battery of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected to a variable resistor R as shown. Which
one of the following is true?
E r

(a) Potential difference across the terminals of the battery is maximum when R = r
(b) Power delivered to resistor is maximum when R = r
(c) Current in the circuit is maximum when R = r
(d) Current in the circuit is maximum when R >>r

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 125
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

INTEGER TYPE

1. Two identical charged spheres are suspended by strings of equal length. The strings make an angle of
300 with each other. When suspended in a liquid of density 0.8 gm/c.c., the angle remains the same.
What is the dielectric constant of liquid? (Density of material sphere is 1.6 gm/cc.)

2. In the circuit shown in the adjacent diagram initially switch K1 is closed and switch K2 is open. After
long time, K2 is also closed. The current through the cell of emf E immediately after K2 is closed is
XE
. Find X.
11R

3. A battery of e.m.f. 10 V and internal resistance 2  is connected in primary circuit with a 100 cm
long uniform potentiometer wire and a rheostat whose resistance is fixed at 998  . A battery of
unknown e.m.f. E is being balanced on this potentiometer wire and balancing length is found to be 50
cm. When area of cross section of potentiometer wire is doubled, then balancing length is found to be
n
75 cm. Area of cross-section (initially) is 100 cm2. If the e.m.f of the battery E= Volts, Find n.
2

4. Potentiometer wire AB has length = 100 cm and resistance 10  .

When the jockey is connected at D (AD = x cm), ammeter reading is
x
0.5 amp. Value of is. (Resistance of ammeter is 1  ).
10

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. Calculate the equivalent capacitance, in F , between the point a and b in figure.

4 F

2 F 8 F 4 F

2 F b
2. A parallel plate capacitor is maintained at a certain potential difference. When a 3mm thick slab is
introduced between the plates, in order to maintain the same potential difference, the distance
between the plates is increased by 2.4mm. Find the dielectric constant of the slab.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 126
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

3. The emf of a storage battery is 90 V before charging and 100 V after charging. When charging began
the current was 10 A. What is current, in ampere, at the end of charging if the internal resistance of
the storage battery during the whole process of charging may be taken as constant and equal to 2  ?

4. In the circuit shown in Figure. Find the charge , in C , on each capacitor

6 F 3 F
B

3 F
3 F
A C
D
6 F
E  10 V

5. The circuit in figure consists of two identical parallel metal plates connected by identical metal
springs to a 100V battery. With the switch open, the plates are uncharged, are separated by a distance
d  8mm and have a capacitance C  2F . When the switch is closed, the distance between the
plates decreases by a factor of half.
d
k k

S
+ -

V
(a) How much charge, in C , collects on each plate?
(b) What is the spring constant, in Nm1 , for each spring?

6. Each capacitor in the combination shown in figure has a breakdown voltage of 16V . What is the
breakdown voltage, in V, of the combination?
20 F 20 F
10 F

20 F 20 F

7. Find the potential difference, in volt, between point M and N of the system shown, if the emf is equal
C
to E 110V and the capacitance ratio 2 is 2.
C1

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 127
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. In the circuit of figure, determine the current, in ampere, in each resistor and the voltage across the
200 resistor.

1
9. Two wires of different materials x and y have resistances per unit lengths, 100   km  ,
1 1
50   km 
1
and temperature coefficients 0.0025  C
o
, 0.00075  C
o
respectively. It is desired
1
to make a coil having 1000 resistance and a temperature coefficient of 0.001  C
o
by using
suitable lengths of the two wires in series. Calculate their respective lengths in metre.

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 128
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ANSWER KEY

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (A) 5. (C)

6. (A) 7. (B) 8. (A) 9. (A) 10. (A)

11. (B) 12. (C) 13. (C) 14. (A) 15. (D)

16. (A) 17. (B) 18. (D) 19. (D) 20. (A)

21. (B) 22. (D) 23. (A) 24. (D) 25. (A)

26. (A) 27. (B) 28. (B) 29. (B) 30. (D)

31. (C) 32. (D) 33. (A) 34. (B) 35. (A)

36. (D) 37. (A) 38. (D) 39. (C) 40. (A)

41. (B) 42. (C) 43. (A) 44. (B) 45. (D)

46. (D) 47. (C) 48. (A) 49. (A) 50. (B)

51. (B) 52. (C) 53. (C) 54. (B) 55. (C)

56. (B) 57. (C) 58. (C) 59. (C) 60. (C)

61. (C) 62. (C) 63. (C) 64. (B) 65. (B)

66. (C) 67. (C) 68. (A) 69. (B) 70. (B)

71. (D) 72. (B) 73. (A) 74. (A) 75. (B)

76. (C) 77. (D) 78. (C) 79. (D) 80. (C)

81. (A) 82. (A) 83. (A) 84. (C) 85. (C)

86. (C) 87. (B) 88. (B) 89. (C) 90. (D)

91. (D) 92. (B) 93. (D) 94. (A) 95. (B)

96. (D) 97. (C) 98. (C)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (BC) 2. (ABCD) 3. (AD) 4. (ABD) 5. (ABCD)

6. (BD) 7. (ABCD) 8. (AD) 9. (ABC) 10. (BC)

11. (ACD) 12. (AD) 13. (BCD) 14. (A,C) 15. (D)

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 129
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

16. (A,C) 17. (B,D) 18. (A,D) 19. (A,C,D) 20. (A,C)

21. (B,C) 22. (A,D) 23. (B,D) 24. (A,B,C) 25. (B,C)

26. (A,D) 27. (A,C,D) 28. (A,B,C) 29. (A,D) 30. (B,C,D)

31. (A,D) 32. (A,D) 33. (A,D) 34. (A,C,D) 35. (B, D)

36. (A, B, C, D) 37. (A, C) 38. (A, D) 39. (C, D) 40. (A, B, C)

41. (A, B, C, D) 42. (A, C, D) 43. (C, D) 44. ( B, C) 45. (A, B)

46. (B, C)

INTEGER

1. [2] 2. [3] 3. [5] 4. [3]

SUBJECTIVE

1. (3) 2. (5) 3. (5)

4. Charge on 6  F capacitor is 24  C , Charge on 3 F capacitor is 18 C

5. (a) 400, (b) 2500 6. (24) 7. (550)

8. (1 in 200  , 4 in 70  , 3 in 80  , 8 in 20  ) 9. (6250, 7500)

CENTERS : MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 130
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ELECTROSTATICS & CAPACITORS, CURRENT ELECTRICITY

(SOLUTIONS)

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. R e q = 1

1 2

1

2. Charge on smaller sphere

V
q  C 
2
4  0 RV

2
Potential di fference
q 1 1 
   
4 0  R 2R 
 VR  1  V
  
 2  2R  4

3. Charges will be i nduced as shown

q 1 1 1
V0   r  2R  R 
4 0
q 1 1 
 
4 0  r 2R 

4. (1)
Induced charge on inner surface of the hollow sphere will be -2Q therefore charge on the outer
surface of the hollow sphere will be (-Q) – (-2Q) = +Q.

5. (3)
At x1 = +5 m, E = 2x104(8 – 5) = 6x104 V/m
qE 200 106  6 104
Initial acceleration, f   = 2.4 m/s2
m 5
Equilibrium position is given by qE = 0 or x0 = +8 m (Position of maximum speed)
Force is varying linearly with x therefore motion will be SHM with amplitude x0 – x1 = 8 - 5 = 3 m
The other extreme position will be x2 = x0 + a = 8 + 3 = +11 m

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 131
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

6. (a)
Imagine ‘q’ to be placed at the centre of a cube of side L then base of the pyramid will become one
q
face of that cube. Therefore, magnetic flux through the base, base  
6 0
q
Flux through the pyramid is zero, therefore flux through all the four slanted faces will be 
6 0
1 q  q
Therefore, flux through a slanted face will be   
4  6 0  24 0

7. Q1  CV,Q2   2C 2V   4CV . Since the capacitors are connected in parallel, the common
potential is (because the plates of opposite polarity are connected together)
Q  Q1 4CV  CV
V' 2  V
C1  C2 C  2C
C'  C1  C2  3C
1 3
 Energy stored  C ' V '2  CV 2
2 2
8. Field at B

(Q / 2) (Q / 2) Q
 
2A 0 2A 0 2A 0
Field at A and C are opposite in direction
9.
2 F
+ 
q

q q
+  S + 
6 F 3 F

Let the flow of charge be q 0, then

+ 
q – q0

+  + 
q + q0 q + q0

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 132
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

q  q 0 (q  q 0 ) (q  q 0 )
  0
2 10 6 6 106 3 106
3q  3q0  q  q0  2q  2q0  0
q0 = 0

10. (A)

P
P'
PP '  2r
r    45
C1 a C2 C1C2  a

Electric field inside the cavity is uniform

Pa Pa   pa
E  c1 ,c2 ae  along PP
30 30 me 30
2l 2  2r
Time to strike P '  
ac epa
3me 0
11. (B)

E  4iˆ  3  y 2  2  ˆj
net will be through shaded area only
net  q 0
q
3  O2  2  12  3 12  2  12 
0
q  30

12. (C)
2 4V
10 V 8V 6 6V
8 2

10 8 4 2
A
i1 i2 i3 i4
O O O O O

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 133
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8  2 2 6
r  r1  r2  r3  r4    
10 8 4 2
 1.95 A reading =1.95A

13. (c)
For, z = 0, Ez = 0
dy y
 dy dx
 dx 2x 2 
y x
 y2 x = constant

14. (a)
Take PQ as the x  axis and PA as the y  axis. Consider two
elements EF and E’F’ of width d at angular distance  at F + A
E ++
angular distance  above and below PO, respectively
+
The magnitude of the filed at P due to either element is +
+
1 rd Q   r 2  Q +  P O
dE   d -  dE cos 
2
4 0 r 2 0 r 2
2
- dE sin 
Resolving the fields, we find that the components along PO sum E'
- dE sin 
up to zero and hence, the resultant field is along PB. dE F' --
B
Therefore, field at P due to pair of elements  2d E sin 

2 2 Q Q
E 2d E sin   2 sin d 
2
0 0 2 0 r  0 r 2
2
E
15. (d)
  dr
  E.A  300 units
 dA
E E  E dr 
20 20
F 2
P 
dA 20
2
Force  PR 2  R 2
2 0
2


Q 2
R

Q 2 2

 20 106   9 109
 2000 N
2 4 2
320 R 2 2 2
16 R 0

8 1.5 10 
16. (a)

17. (b)
Net flux is due to charge inside S only

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 134
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

18. (d)

2K
R
K / R K
R
K
K
R
R
Net field at centre = zero

19. (d)
R1 v0/ k R1 v0 / k 2
v0 P

R2 R2

O O

Using nodal at point P

v0 v0 v0 v0
 v0  2 0
k  k k  k 0
R1 R1 R2
2
 R1  k 2  2k  1  k  1
   
 R2  k k

20. (a)
B  
v B  v A    E.dL
A

Hence the integral represents the potential at centre of ring.

KQ
v centre 
R
9 10 1.11 10 10
9
  2 volt
  1
2

21. (b)

22. (d)
Time const. = 3RC
In steady state, potential drop = v
3
CV
 Q
3
t
1  e 3RC 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 135
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

23. (a)
Initially Finally

 2C  4 C
2V 4V
 2C  4 C

 Wbattery 4V  2  4  8 J
2 2

Energy absorbed by capacitor =

 4 
 2  6 J
2 2
 Heat produced = 2 J

24. (d)
2R I/2
I RA 3R I/3

6R I/6

 IA : IB : IC : ID
I I I
 I: : :  6 :1: 2 : 3
6 3 2

25. (a)
0 A
C ; Q  CV
x
dQ dC  dC  dx 
i V  V  
dt dt  dt  dt 
 A 
i  V  0 2   a sin t 
 x 
0 EAa
 Amplitude of current I 
d02
26. (a) 
  KP1
Field due to P1 at P2 =
r3
  kp  3kp1p 2 ˆ
Force on P2  P2  3 1 ˆ   
r  r  r4

27. (b)
A

II

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 136
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

KQ
Net field due to part I and II at A  2
 2R 
1 1 4
  E I A   E II A   2   R 3
4 0 4R 3
R
 E II A  E
12 0
PR
  E I B  E
12 0

28. (b)
Resistance of 0.6 m of wire  0.6  5
= 3
 2  3
    3  6 10
 5  R 
 5  R  1000  R  995 

29. (b)
x  v1 x  v2 x  v3
  0
R1 R2 R3
1 1 1  v1 v 2 v 3
x     
 R R 2 R 3  R1 R 2 R 3
1
v v v  1 1 1 
x   1  2  3    
 R1 R 2 R 3   R1 R 2 R 3 

30. (d)

31. (c)
Net acc of block down the incline is
 g  a 0  3qE 1 3qE 
a   a   g  a 0  a
2 2m 2 m 
0
N s3
co
qE

qE
0
) s in 3 m  g  a 0  cos 30
a0 
g+ 30
ma0 q E sin 30
m(

h 1
Now  at 2
sin 30 2
  qE   8h 2h
 2h  14 g  a 0  3    t 2  t  t2
  m   qE   qE 
g  a0  3   g  a0  3  
 m m
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 137
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

32. (d)
The net force F on the particle towards O is the cause of acceleration a .
Y
+Q
F0
L
 q
X
O 
F 0
L
+Q

F  2F0 cos 
2 qQ x Qq x
F 

40 x   2
2
 2
x  2 2 0 x 2   2
 
32

We observe that F is zero for large values of x and also for x  0 .

So, a must increase to a maximum and fall to zero at O
To the right of O, the net force is to the left while motion is to the right. Thus, the direction of a is
opposite to the particle’s direction of motion and is taken as negative as shown.

33. (a)
If charges were placed at all the corners, the field at the centre would be zero. Hence, the field at the
centre due to any one charge is equal(and opposite) to the field due to all the other  n  1 charges.

34. (b)
Since the potential function is not defined for an infinite conducting sheet, hence to solve this
problem we either calculate potential difference or use force equations
Electric field due to an infinite dielectric sheet

E1 
2 0
Electric field at the axis of a disc of radius R is
  x 
E2  1  
20  x 2  R 2 
The resultant electric field is given by
 x
E  E1  E 2 
20 x 2  R 2
Force on an electron is
ex dv ex
F  eE  F    mv 
2 0 x 2  R 2 dx 2 x 2  R 2
0
v 0
e x mv 2 0
 m  v dv  
0
20 
3R x2  R 2
dx 
2

e
20  x2  R2  3R
v
eR
m 0

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 138
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

35. (a)
 r 
Vf  Vi  log  f 
20  ri 
  52  12 2    13 
 V log e   V loge  
2 0  12  2 2  4 2  20 5
 

36. (d)
Q 1 1 1 Q 1 1 
V0   r  2R  R  V0   r  2R 
40 40

37. (a)
Each of the charged sphere will have potential energy due to its own charge or self energy
1 q2
U1 
80 r
The mutual potential energy stored in one sphere in the elastic field of the other is
q1q 2 1 q2
 U2  U2 
40r12 4 0 R
Therefore the P.E. stored in the system of spheres is
q2  1 1 
U  2U1  U 2  
4 0  R r 

38. (d)
At the surface of the charged sphere, whether it consists of a single piece or two pieces close
together, the electric field strength from Gauss’s Law is
1 Q
E
40 R 2
Q
The electric charge per unit surface area is  
4R 2
1
This electric field exerts a force F  EQ on the charge Q  A which resides on a surface of
2
1
area  A , as illustrated in figure. The reason for the factor of is that the electric field strength is
2
E
E at the outer surface of the sphere and zero inside and hence its average value comes out to be .
2
The force per unit exerted by the charges on the pieces of the sphere is therefore
F Q2
 P
A 32  2  0 R 4
The required force can be considered to be analogous to the force with which a liquid having a
pressure P would push apart the two pieces of the sphere and this force is also the product of P and
the cross-sectional area of the intersection of the plane and sphere.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 139
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

R
x

 
So, F  pa  p x 2 
 F  p R 2  h 2 
Hence if follows that the two parts of the sphere can be held together by a force
Q2
F
32  0 R 4 
R 2  h2 
39. (c)
At any point over the spherical Gaussian surface, net electric field is the vector sum of electric fields
due to q1,  q1 and q2 .

40. (a)

F F

 2  2 2 R 2
Electrostatics repulsive force: Fele    R F  Fele 
 2 2 0
 0 
41. (b)
 Q Mg A0
qE  Mg q  Mg q  Mg q
0 A0 Q
42. (c)
Consider an element of length dx , carrying a charge dq at a distance x from O . Then, by definition
dq   dx
dq
O
 x2  x
 dq   0   dx dx
 L
 
O L
0 2 0  L3  0 L2
  dq  x dx  Q  Q
L O
 
O
L  3  3

43. (a)
Since the spring is metallic so the charge distributes equally on P
Q
both the blocks. Hence a charge resides on each block, due
2
to which the blocks will repel each other with a force given by xD l
 Q  Q 
C
1  2   2  O l
F  k  L  L0 
4 0 L2 l/ 2
Solving for Q l
A B

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 140
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Q  2L 40 k  L  L0 
3L 0
Substituting L  , we get Q  3L0 20 L0
2
44. (b)
The force due to one charge on the charge at P is shown here. When all the forces are taken in to
account, then the sine component cancel each other. So,
Fnet  Fy  4Fcos 
h Q 1 h
Since, we see that cos    Fnet  4
2  2  2
h2  40  h 2   h2 
2  2  2
 
4Qh
 Fnet  32
(UPWARDS)
 2 
40  h 2  
 2 

F cos 
F
y
F sin 
2
x  h2  
2 x
h

A  O
2

For equilibrium of m , this Fnet must balance the weight of the particle mg (downwards)
4Qh
 3
 mg
 2  2
4 0  h 2  
 2 

32
mg 0  2  2 
 Q  h  
h  2

45. (d)
m2g 2  q 2E 2
a net 
m
 
 T  2  T  2
a net 2 qE
 qE 
g2   
m
mg

46. (d)
Charge on the inner surface will be  q and that on the outer surface will be zero so to make electric
field inside the conductor zero and potential of the surface to the zero.

47. (c)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 141
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

48. (a)
The motion of the charge will be like projectile with range
2
 R  V sin  2  R V2
AB  2    0 So,  0
2 a sin  2  a
V02
For minimum velocity, sin  2  1  R
a
  R
q 
qE  30 2  2  104  30  10 3
where a   a 3
 2 104 ms2
m m 1 10  3 0
1
 V0  0.02ms

49. (a)     
U  P.E and N  p E
  A
U is MINIMUM when   0 and for   0 N0 q
50. (b)
q
F B
Electric field at the center due to the charges on opposite corners will
cancel each other. Therefore at the center net electric field will be due
to only that charge which does not has chare on the opposite corner.
1 q 1 q 1 q E C
E net 
4 0 x 2

4 0  2a  2

160 a 2 q q
q
51. (b) D
In the region I and III net electric field is zero. In the region II net
electric field is
 

I II III
A B

  
E II    and is uniform
20 20 0
52. (c)
Initially potential difference between the spheres is VA  VB . Since earthing of B will make potential
of B zero but potential difference will not change because potential difference between two
concentric spheres depends only on the charge on the innersphere. Hence
Final Potential Difference  Initial Potential Differences
 VA'  VB'  VA  VB  VA'  0  VA  VB  VA'  VA  VB

53. (c)
Q2  Q3
Further , { By induction}
Q 2Q2 Q 2   Q2  Q  Q3
V  2    V  2
C 2C 2C 2C
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 142
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

54. (b)

55. (c)
The capacitance of the capacitor increases initially and then decreases and hence the positive charge
on plate A first increases and then decreases. Due to this the current in the outer circuit first flows
from B to A and then from A to B.

56. (b)
C C Q 2 C 2 3Q 2 3C 2

C Q C

E E

E
57. (c)
1 C C   1C 2 1 2
Loss   1 2   V1  V2   Loss     V1  V2   C  V1  V2 
2  C1  C 2  2 2  3

58. (c)
During electrostatic equilibrium. Electrostatic attraction between the plates  spring force
q2
  kx
20 A


 CV 2  k  d  4d    q  CV
 
20A  5 
2
 
  A 
 0  V2
  4d  
 5  0 AV 2 40AV 2
 
  0.2 kd k 
2 0 A 0.256d3 d3

59. (c)
A 1

C AB X
X 1

B
X 1
1  X
X 1
 X  X2  1  X2  X  1  0
1 5 1  2.236 32
 X  X  X  X  1.6 F
2 2 2

60. (c)
The 3 F capacitor has energy 600 J

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 143
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

1
 600  10 6 
2
 
3  10 6 V02  V0  20V  VAB  3V0  60V
This is 60 V has to divide in between 2 F and 6 F in the inverse ratio of their capacitance i.e 3 :1
 3 
So, V2 F    60V  45V
 3 1 

61. (c)

62. (c)
On connecting, let V be the common potential. Then, by Law of Conservation of Charge
Qinitial  Qfinal
C1V1  C2 V2
 C1V1  C2 V2  C1V  C2 V  V
C1  C2
If Ei be total initial energy and Er be the total final energy. Then,
Loss  Ei  Ef
1 1 1 1 C1C2
 Loss  C1V12  C 2 V22   C1  C 2  V 2  Loss   V1  V2 2
2 2 2 2 C1  C2
We get above result by putting value of V and then solving

63. (c)
C C C
Cp  C     ......
2 4 8
 
 1 
 CP  C   CP  2C  2 F
1
 1 
 2

64. (b)
When we move from left to right the voltage increases and this increase is just within is just within
the capacitors and remains constant in the conducting wires. Also for series combination
1
 V
C
 C1  C2

65. (b)
Potential difference across the branch de is 6 V
Net capacitance of de branch is 2.1F
So, q  CV
 q  2.1 6 C
 q  12.6 C
Potential across 3 F capacitance is
12.6
V  4.2volt
3
Potential across 2 and 5 combination in parallel is 6  4.2  1.8 V
So, q '  1.8  5   9 C

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 144
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

66. (c)
1 1 1 1 1
 1    ......  2  Cs  0.5 F
Cs 2 4 Cs 1  1
2
67. (c)
0 A 0 A
C  C
 1  1
d  t 1   d  t 1  
 K  K
68. (a)

1 2 A
A

d1 d2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 d d  A12
       1 2  Cs 
Cs C1 C2 Cs 1A   2 A Cs A  1  2  2d1  1d 2
d1 d2
69. (b)
C C

A C C B

C C

C C

The figure shows two independent balanced Wheatstone Bridges connected in parallel each having a
capacitance C. so, Cnet  CAB  2C

70. (b)
Equivalent capacitance of the circuit
x y
Equivalent
Circuit
x y

V
 A
C  2 0 
 d 
1 1  2   0 A   2 0 AV 2
Energy stored U  CV 2  U  V 
2 2 d  d
71. (d)
Since both free terminal are earthed, hence they being at same potential can be connected to given
the following equivalent circuit.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 145
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Now, all three being in parallel between A and B, will given net capacitance as 10 F

72. (b)
The equivalent circuit is shown here for convenience
10 V

4 F 2 F

Potential across each capacitor is 5 V (equally divided)

 q  CV   4F  5V=20  C

73. (A)
3C
In the circuit C net 
4
3CV
When key K was open, charge stored in the capacitor was q initial 
4
When key K is closed, capacitor 3C becomes short circuited and hence the new charge on C is
qfinal  CV
So, charge flowing is

+ - + -
3C

V
q  qfinal  qinitial
3CV CV
 q  CV  
4 4
74. (a)
Whenever a resistance is joined in parallel with the voltmeter, the total resistance of the circuit
decreases so that the current increases and hence ammeter reading also increases. The equivalent
resistance across the voltmeter decreases and hence its reading will decrease.

75. (b)
Convectional current is the current which is developed due to the transportation of charge.
q transported
 t  2 v
t

76. (c)
This is basically an RC circuit, being charged from a battery. The resistance (R) of the voltmeter is
the resistance in the circuit. The voltage across R is
V = (Circuit Current )(Resistance) = Reading of the voltmeter (V)
Hence the nature of the V-t curve is the same as that of the I-t curve

77. (d)

78. (c)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 146
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

79. (d)
R1  R 2  Constant
   R1  R 2   0  R 1  R 2
R1 
 R1T  R 2T  
R2 
80. (c)
In steady state the branch containing the capacitor can be omitted and hence current in the circuit is
2V  V
I V R
R  2R
1 2
V
 I I V C I
3R
For loop 36543 6 3
- +
VC  V  2V  I  2R   0
V 5 4
 VC   V  2V   2R 
3R 2V 2R
2V V
 VC  V  
3 3
81. (a)
On short circuiting
E 1.5
I  3  R  0.5 
R R
82. (a)
7  and 3  are in parallel; 6  and 4  are in parallel and both in series.
So
73 4 6
 R eq    Req  2.1  2.4  Req  4.5 
73 46
83. (a)

A B
6

3
1.6 2.4
A B

A B
6

3.4 and 6  all in parallel. Hence

1 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 12 4
      RP   
RP 3 4 6 RP 12 9 3
84. (c)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 147
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

85. (c)
1.5 5
0.2   1  0.2 r  1.5  r  2.5 
5r 2

86. (c)
Let E = emf of the cell A
E 4E
VA  VB   4  6 4
4  6 10
E 6E D + B
VA  VD  6  -
6  4 10
4 6
E
VB  VD 
5 C
87. (b)
The given circuit is that of a Wheatstone bridge.
R R

R 6R R
E
R 4R
4
C

R 2R

A B

2R 4R

E 4 
The circuit is balanced one since,
Resistance across AC resistance across CB

resistance acrossAD resistance across BD
Thus, no current will flow across 6R of the side CD. The given circuit will now be equivalent to
R 2R

2R 4R
E

3R 4
2R

6R
E
E
4
4

For maximum power, net external resistance = Total internal resistance.

 2R  4  R2

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 148
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

88. (b)
x
Let x , y and be the dimensions of the block.
3
x
 
x 3 R max
 R max   R min     9
x xy R min
y 
3
89. (c)
When each element of circuit is multiplied by a factor k then equivalent resistance also become k
times.
Let the equivalent resistance between A and B be X.

R1 kR 1 k 2 R1 R1
A A

R2 kR 2 k 2R 2 R2 +

B B

kR 1 k 2R 1 k 3R 1
A
3
k R2 X R1 R2 kX
R2 k 2R 2
B

So, equivalent circuit becomes

1  R1  R 2   R 12  R 22  6 R 1R 2
For k   X
2 2

90. (d)
9
 I
 1A
9
At A a current of 1 A divides into 0.5 A and 0.5 A.
At B the current of 0.5 A divides into 0.25 A and 0.25 A

91. (d)
In a Wheatstone bridge, the deflection in the galvanometer does not change whenever the battery and
galvanometer are interchanged.

92. (b)
E 2 r1 E 2 r2
2
 2
 r  r1   r  r2 
   
r1 r 2  r22  2rr2  r2 r 2  r12  2rr1   r1r 2  r1r22  2rr1r2  r2r12  2rr1r2
 r 2  r1  r2   r1r2  r1  r2   r  r1r2

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 149
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

93. (d)
When we move in the direction of the current in a uniform conductor , the potential decreases
linearly. When we pass through the cell, from its negative to its positive terminal, the potential
increase by an amount equal to its potential difference.
This is less than its emf, as there is some potential drop across its internal resistance when the cell is
driving current.

94. (a)
since E  l . So, for E1  E2 we have l1  l2 and hence null point will be obtained at shorter length
i.e. to left of C.

95. (b)
Voltage drop across 50  and 30  (n series) is
V '   80  0.1  8 V
Voltage across 20  branch is also 8 V.
So, current in 20  branch is
8
I2   0.4 A
20
Hence total current in the circuit is 0.5 A.
Also voltage drop across R is 12-8=4 V.
 4  I total R  4   0.5 R  R 8 

96. (d)

97. (c)
From Y to X charge flows to plates a and b
 q a  q b   0,  q a  q b   27 C
3 F 6 F 9 F 36 F
a b
+ - + - + - + -
18 F 18 F 1A 1A

3 1 V 6  3 1 V 6 

9V 9V
Initial Figure Final Figure
(when switch was open) (when switch is closed)

 27 C charge flows from Y to X The correct answer is (c)

98. When current in resistance is 1A then

q  25  5 106 C
1
U i   25 106  52
2

Finally
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 150
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

q  25  5 106 C
1
U i   25 106  52
2
Work done by battery in this process will be
 q ' q   5
–6
 
W  25  10  106 5 = 50  25  10 J

Heat loss = 25  10 –6 [50] = 1250 J

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (b, c)
dv
E
dx

Direction of electric field is from high potential to low potential

 in slab direction of electric field is downward (same as other two region so v will increase.
kq
2. Vr  R 
R
kq
Vr  R 
r

R2

R1

Q1

-Q2

kQ1 k(Q2 ) Q Q 
So V1    K 1  2 
R1 R2  R1 R 2 
kQ1 kQ 2
V2  
R2 R2

 1 1 
V1  V2  K(Q1 )   
 R1 R 2 
If Q1 = 0, V1 = V2.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 151
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

3. (1,4)
B
A qA
qB
K

2R

kq A kq B
 2 …..(1)
R 2R
kq A kq B 3
  ……(2)
2R 2R 2
From (1) & (2)

qA 1

qB 2
After earths potential of B becomes zero.
kq A kq B
 0 qB  q A
2R 2R
q ' q ' kq kq ' kq 1
 B  B  1 VA  A  B  A  V
qA ' qA R 2R 2R 2

4. (a, b, d)
Current through 1   0 . Hence a total of 2A current will pass through 2 which further goes
equally in 2  resistances. Voltmeter will measure the p.d. across 2  resistance = 2  2  4V

5. (a, b, c, d)
+
 q1  q2
+

6. (b, d)
kq1
Due to outer surface charge; field at centre =
b2
Potential at centre due to all charges in space
K  Q  q  kq kq1 kq
   
R R b a

7. (a, b, c, d)
E0 for r  r0
KQ
E 2 for r  r0
r

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 152
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. (a, d)
For series R  R1  R 2  q dreq  dR 1  dR 2  0.3 
R 1R 2 18
For parallel R eff   2
R1  R 2 9
dR dR 1 dR 2
 
R 2 R 12 R 2 2
 0.1 0.2  0.6
 dR  4     0.07
 9 36  9

9. (a, b, c)
v
I
R
  Rt
1 e L 
Joule heating = i 2 R
v2 2


P  2 1 e L R
R
 Rt

dp L
will be maximum when t  ln 2
dt R
 dp 
 dt
 tR

 k e L e L 
2tR



2
dE max v
(b)  vI  I 2 R 
dt 4R
v
When I 
2R
dE max
is maximum
dt
(c)
p
dp/dt

t t

10. (b, c)

500 V
2 2

R1 
 200  R2 
 300 
P P
v1 R1 4 p1 i 2 R1 R1 4
    
v2 R 2 9 p2 i 2 R 2 R 2 9

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 153
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

11. (a, c, d)
For R BC
A

R/2
R

B
R/2
R
R eq 
2
For R BC
A

R
R

C B R

R
R

VA  VD
Hence R AC
For R AC
A

R R

C D
R R

There will be no current in BD

R
 R eq 
2

12. (a, d)
Dipole in non-uniform field must experience a force

13. (b, c, d)
Current through NP = 3 Amp
i1 R 2  20 
   i1    1  2 amp
i2 R1  10 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 154
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

VNP  20 volt  vMP  0.5 R1

 R1  40 
7
Total current in the circuit =  3.5
2
40
Total resistance = R 
7
7 40  7R
 69   R    69   20
2 7  2
7R
  49  R  14 
2
14. (a,c)

15. (d)
2d qE qV 2d 2md 2
t when a   t 
a m md qV qV
md
t  2d 2
  2  t  2T
T d2

16. (a,c)

17. (b,d)
1
mv 2  QV
2
2QV
p2 v m
  QV  p  2mQV t   v  0  at
2m a QV
 
m d 
2md 2
 t
QV

18. (a,d)
1  qA qB 
    2V ….(1)
40  R 2R 
1  qA qB  3
and,    V …(2)
40  2R 2R  2
qA 1
Solving equations (1) and (2), we get 
qB 2
When B is earthed, potential of B becomes zero. So, q 'B  q'A  q A {charge on A remains same)
q 'A
  1
q 'B
Also after earthling

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 155
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

qA  1 1  qA
VA  VB    
40  R 2R  80 R
1 qA V V
Substituting qB  2qA in equation (1), we get   VA  VB 
40 2R 2 2
V
Since B is earthed, so VB  0 and hence VA 
2

19. (a,c,d)

20. (a,c)

21. (b,c)
The electron will experience a downward acceleration a , given by
eF 1.6 1019  2000 eE
a  31
 a  3.6  1014 ms 2
m 9 10 m
So, we can consider the electron to be a projectile launched with some initial velocity between the
plates under influence of downward acceleration a.
From the point of launch let us consider the rightward horizontal as the x  axis and upward vertical
as y  axis, let us calculate the height to which the electron will rise and its horizontal range.
Considering upward vertical motion, we have
1
 
0  6  106 sin 45 t   3.5  1014 t 2
2
 t  2.4 108 s
Considering motion along x  axis, we get
x  range   6  106 cos 45  2.4  108  x  0.102 m  10.2 cm
T
The vertical displacement in half the total time i.e, at maximum height , we have t 
2
The vertical height is given by
1 2
    
y  6 106 sin 45 1.2  10 8  3.5  1014 1.2  108
2

 y  0.0509  0.0252  y  0.0257  2.57 cm
So, the electron will not touch the upper plate and will strike the lower plate at the other edge.

22. (a,d)

Q1

Q2

From the diagram, it can be observed that Q1 is positive, Q2 is negative.

Number of lines on Q1 is greater and number of lines is directly proportional to magnitude of
charge. So, Q1  Q 2
Electric field will be zero to the right of Q2 as it has small magnitude and opposite sign to that of Q1

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 156
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

23. (b,d)
Using Work Energy Therorem, we get
1 qE
2
  
mv 2  qE    cos 60  v
m
At point B, we have
2
mv 2 m  qE 
T  qE   T  qE     2qE
   m 

24. (a,b,c) 
The spring force F2  kx ˆi

Similarly, the electrostatic force Fe due to the electric field created by plate b is
   ˆ Q2 ˆ
Fe  QEiˆ  Q  i  i
 2 0  2A 0
where A is the area of the plate. Notice that charges on plate a cannot exert a force on itself, as
required by Newton’s Third Law. Thus, only the electric field due to plate b is considered. At
equilibrium the two forces cancel and we have
 Q 
kx  Q    QE
 2A0 
Q2 QE
Which gives x 
2kA 0 k

25. (b,c)

26. (a,b,c,d)

27. (a,c,d)
The effective capacitance
4  5 20
C  F
9 9
The charge on C1 is given by
20
Q1  CV   9  20 C
9
The charge on C2 is given by
 C2  2
Q2    Q1   20  8 C
 C 2  C3  5
The charge on C3 is given by
 C3  3
Q3    Q1   20  12 C
 C 2  C3  5
Q Q C  C  C3 
Since, 2  3  Q1  Q 2  Q3  Q 2  3 Q 2  Q 2  2 
C2 C3 C2  C2 
 C2   2   C3   3 
 Q2    Q1    20  8 C and Q 3    Q1    20  12 C
 C 2  C3   23  C 2  C3   23

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 157
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

28. (a,b,c)
When either A or C is earthed (both not earthed together), a parallel plate capacitor is formed with B ,
with  Q charges on the inner surfaces. The other plate , which is not earthed, plays no role, hence
charge of amount  Q flows to the earth. When both are earthed together. A and C effectively
become connected. The plates now form two capacitors in parallel, with capacitances in the ratio
1: 2 , and hence share chare Q in the same ratio.

29. (a,d)
q2
Since, F 
20 A
30. (b,c,d)

31. (a,d)

32. (a,d)
28
Cs   1.6 F Since Q  Cs V  1.6 10 6  300
28
4.8 104
Q  4.8 104 C V1   240 V
2  106
4.8 104 Q2 Q2
V2   60V U 
8 106 2C1 2C2
2

 U
 4.8 104   1 
 U  3.2  2.4 102 J  U  7.2 102 J
 6 
2  1.6 10 

33. (a,d)
Since battery is still in connection. So,
V  V0
 Q0  C0 V0 and Q  kC0 V0
 Q  kQ0
Since k  1
 k 1
1
Also U 0  Q 0 V0 and
2
1
U QV  kU 0  Q  kQ0 and V  V0  Hence U  U0
2

34. (a,c,d)
Since same charge flows through 7 F and 3 F (as both are in series), so
Q7  Q3  42 C  7  6  3V3  V3  14V
So, V3.9  20V
Charge on 12 F n capacitor is
73
Q12  Q3.9  Q7  Q12  3.9  20   20
7  30
120
 Q12  120 C  Total charge in the circuit  V12   10 V
12
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 158
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Voltage across battery is 14  6  10  30 V

35. (b, d)
In steady state, no current passes through the branches containing the capacitors. So,
4 4 1
I   A
8  2  10 20 5
8
Loop ABCA 1 1
A A
5 5
C
1 1
   8    2  V1  0 C1  8 F 2
5 5
B

10
  V1   2V
5
Loop ABDA A
1 1
   2    10   V2  0 1
A + C 2  10 F
5 5 5 -
 V2  2  0.4 2 D
1
 V2  2.4V A
5
10 
B
36. (a, b, c, d)
E V A
I
RA  RV I
E
 RA  RV  …(1)
I
Since E  V  IR A E
 V  E  IR A  E …(2)
Also, V  IR V
V
 RV  …(3)
I
Potential difference across the ammeter is VA  IR A
 VA  IR A  E  V …(4)
So, from (1), (2), (3) and (4), we observe all the options to be correct.

37. (a, c)

38. (a, d)
I
 6 1.5  6 16 2 k R1
R eq    2   2  k
 7.5  5 5
V 24 3
I   5mA   5  7.5 mA 24 V 6 k R 2 R L 1.5 k
R eq 16 2
For potential difference across R1
 V1  7.5  2  15V

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 159
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

For potential difference across R2

 V2  24  15  9 V
2
V 2 V 2 15  9 2 225 6 25
For power PR1  1 : 2  :   
R1 R 2 2 6 2 81 3
V22 9 2
PR L    54 mW
R L 1.5
If R1 and R2 are interchanged

I
6z k R 2

24 V 2 k R1 R L 1.5 k

  2 1.5   3
R '  R 1 || R 2   
 2  1.5  3.5
R'
VL'   24 V  3 V
R2  R '
Now power dissipated in RL is
VL'2 32
P 'L    6 mW
R L 1.5

39. (c, d) R 2 3
In steady state, no current passes through the branch 1
that contains a fully charged capacitor, because a I1 I1
R
fully charged capacitor is a dc blocking element. R
8
R
I
Hence the circuit becomes 7 4
For Loop 1284561 I  I  I1 
6 5
2I1R  IR  E  0
E
 6I1  3I  15 …(1)
For Loop 784567
  I  I1  R  IR  E  0
2IR  I1R  E  0
 3I1  6I  15
3I1 15
  3I  …(2)
2 2
Add (1) and (2), we get
3  15
  6  I1  15 
2  2
 3  12  30  15
   I1   15I1  15  I1  1 A
 2  2
 6  3I  15  3I  9  I3 A
For Loop 23482

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 160
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

VC  I  3  I1  3  0  VC  9  3  12 V

40. (a, b, c)
As C and D are joined, they must be at the same potential, and may be treated as the same point. This
gives the equivalent resistance as 8  . When we distribute current in the network using symmetry,

20  5
C
A D B
5 20 

20  I1 C 5 I0  I1
I0
A I0  2I1
I0 I0  I1 I1 B
5 D 20
VA  VD  VA  VC
I0 2I 0 3I 0
 20I1  5  I0  I1   I1   I 0  2I1  I 0  
5 5 5
which is the current flowing from D to C.

41. (a, b, c, d)

42. (a, c, d)
When X is joined to Y for a long time (charging), the energy stored in the
capacitor is equal to the heat produced in R i.e., H1 C R
When X is joined to Z (discharging), the energy stored in C   H1 
reappears as heat  H2  in R. So,
Y
H1  H2 . Also, we observe that energy supplied by the battery is
H  H1  H2 . So, Z
X
OPTIONS (a), (c) and (d) are correct.

43. (c, d)
RC

V  V0 1  e  t / t  
2
21
E E  
V0  (as both R and R are in series)  V  1  e RC

2 2 
44. (b, c)

45. (a, b)
The resistance in the middle plays no part in the charging process of C, as it does not alter either the
potential difference across the RC combination or the current through it.
C discharges through R + R in series.

46. (b, c)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 161
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

INTEGER TYPE

1. (2)
1 Fe
   b If angle remains same 
2 Apparent weight
 Fe initially

weight
Fe
K

mg
2
 K2

2. (3)
After a long time p.d. across capacitor = 2E
When K2 is closed, just after K2 is closed, capacitor behaves like a source of 2E.
R 2E

2E
2R
E
3R
3E
Hence current through emf E 
11R

3. (5)

R
A
 10  R
    E1
 1000  R  2
 10  3R
    
  E1
 1000  R  4 2 
 2
1000  R
 23
1000  R 4
 4000  2R  3000  3R
 R  1000 
10 5000 5
 E1   500  
2000 2000 2

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 162
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

4. (3)
15 V 1

x D
A B
1 5
A
1/2 A
Potential drop across AD = 3 volt
Remaining drop = 12 volt
3
Current in AD 
x
3 1
    11  x   12
 x 2
 x 2  19x  66  0
 x 2  22x  3x  66  0
 x 3 
 AD  30 cm
AD
 3
10

SUBJECTIVE TYPE
1.  3F 
Assume a potential difference across a and b, and notice that the potential difference across the 8 F
capacitor must be zero by symmetry. Then the equivalent capacitance can be determine from the
following circuit,
4F 4F
6F 6F 3F
a b a b a
 

2F 2F

2. (5)
If d is the separation between the plates (each of area A0 ) of a parallel plate condenser in air, then its
 A
capacitance in air, then its capacitance C  0 . …..(1)
d
If a slab of thickness t is introduced between the plates with new separation d’, then its new
capacitance,
0 A
C'  …….(2)
  1 
d ' t 1    
  K 
As Q  CV , the charge on the capacitor is same in both cases therefore to maintain the same
potential difference the capacitance C and C’ must be same i.e, from (1) and (2)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 163
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

0 A 0 A   1 
=  d  d ' t  1    
d   1    K 
d ' t 1    
  K 
Here, d '  d  2.4 mm  d  2.4  103 m
t  3mm  3 103 m
  1    1 
 d  d  2.4 10 3  3 10 3 1      3 1      2.4  K  5
  K    K 
3. (5)
The voltage supplied by the charging plant is here constant which is equal to,
V  E1  I1r   90   10  2 
V  110 V
Let If be the current at the end of charging process. Then,
V  Ef  If r
V  E f 110  100
 If    If  5A
r 2

4. Let the charge on each capacitor be as shown in figure. Applying KVL in the loop (1), traversing
clock-wise

6 F 3 F
+ - B + -
q1 + q1  q 3
1 q3 3 F 2
3 F - 6 F

A + - + -
C
q 2 3 D
q 2  q3

E  10 V
q q q
 1  3  2 0
6 3 3
 q1  2q3  2q3  0 ….(1)
For loop (2), traversing clockwise, we have
q q  q q q
 1 3   2 3  3  0
 3  6 3
2q1  5q3  q2  0 ……..(2)
For loop ABCEA, traversing clockwise, we have
q q  q 
 1  1 3  10  0
6 3
3q1  2q3  60 …..(3)
Solving equations (1), (2) and (3), we get
q1  24 C ;
q2  18 C ;
q3  6 C
Charge on 6 F capacitor is 24 C
Charge on 3 F capacitor is 18 C
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 164
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

5. (a) 400, (b) 2500

d
With switch closed, distance d '  and capacitance
2
 0 d 2 0 A
C'    2C
d' d
 
(a) Q  C '  V   2 2 10 6 F 100 V   400 C
(b) The force stretching out one spring is
2 2
Q2 4C2  V  2C2  V  2C  V 
2
F   F
20a 20A  0A  d
 d d
 
d
One string stretches by distance x 
4
2
F 2C  V   4  8C  V 
 k 
2
 k
 
8 2  106 F 100V 
2

 k  2500 Nm1
  2
x d d d2
8 103 m 
6. (24)
The given combination of capacitors is equivalent to the circuit diagram shown in the figure
Assume the charge on point A to be Q. Then,

A B C D
40 F 10 F 4 0  F

Q   40 F  VAB  10F  VBC   40 F  VCD

 VBC  4VAB  4VCD
So, the centre capacitor will break down first, at VBC  15V and when this occurs, we have
1
VAB  VCD   VBC   4V  VAD  VAB  VBC  VCD  4V  16V  4V  24V
4

7. (550)
Let C1  C and C2  2C and the charges on the different capacitors be as shown in figure.
Net charge on isolated system should be zero
M

+ q 3  10 EC
-

N
Hence, q1  q2  q3  0 …..(1)
Applying Loop’s Law in two loops we have,
q q q q
E 3  1 0 E 2  3 0
2C C 2C 2C
Solving these three equations, we get q3  10 EC
q
 VMN  3  5E  VMN  550V
2C
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 165
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. (1 in 200  , 4 in 70  , 3 in 80  , 8 in 20  )
Name the currents as shown in the figure. Then I1  I 2  I4  I3
Loop abgha 200I1  40  80I2  0
Loop bcfgb 80I 2  40  360  20I3  0 Loop cfedc 360  20I3  70I4  80  0

Now, I4  4 A upward in 70 
I 2  3A upward in 80 
I3  8 A downward in 20 
And for the 200  , V  IR  1A  200    200 V

9. (6250, 7500)
Let Rx and Ry be the respective resistances at a given temperature. The total resistance after a
charge  T becomes
R  R x 1  0.0025 T   R y 1  0.00075 T  …(1)
1
As 0.001 o C  is the temperature coefficient of the combination, we also have
R   R x  R y  1  0.001 T  …(2)
From equations (1) and (2), we get
R x 1  0.0025 T   R y 1  0.00075 T 
  R x  R y  1  0.001 T 
Thus we get
5
Rx  Ry …(3)
3
Also, R x  R y  1000  …(4)
On solving equations (3)and (4), we get
R x  625  and R y  375 
The respective lengths are
1
Lx   625  6.25 km  6250 m
100
1
And L y   375  7.5 km  7500 m
50

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 166
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

CLASSICAL MAGNETISM, MAGNETISM, EMI & AC

MAGNETISM AND MATTER

CONCEPT SUMMARY
1. The science of magnetism is old. It has been known since ancient times that magnetic materials tend
to point in the north-south direction; like magnetic poles repel and unlike ones attract and cutting a
bar magnet in two leads to two smaller magnets. Magnetic poles cannot be isolated.

2. When a bar magnet of dipole moment m is placed in a uniform magnetic field B,

(a) the force on it is zero.
(b) the torque on it is m  B
(c) its potential energy is -m•B. where we choose the zero of energy at the orientation when m is
perpendicular to B.

3. Consider a bar magnet of size l and magnetic moment m, at a distance r from its mid-point, where
r >>l, the magnetic field B due to this bar is,
 m m
B  0 3 (along axis)  0 3 (along equator)
2r 4 r

4. Gauss’s law for magnetism states that the net magnetic flux through any closed surface is zero
B  
allarea
B.S  0
elements S

5. The earth’s magnetic field resembles that of a (hypothetical) magnetic dipole located at the centre of
the earth. The pole near the geographic north pole of the earth is called the north magnetic pole.
Similarly, the pole near the geographic south pole is called the south magnetic pole. This dipole is
aligned making a small angle with the rotation axis of the earth. The magnitude of the field on the
earth’s surface = 4 105 T.

6. Three quantities are needed to specify the magnetic field of the earth on its surface — the horizontal
Component, the magnetic declination, and the magnetic dip. These are known as the elements of the
earths magnetic field.

7. Consider a material placed in an external magnetic field B0. The magnetic intensity is defined as,
B
H 0
0
The magnetisation M of the material is its dipole moment per unit volume. The magnetic field B in
the material is, B   0  H  M 

8. For a linear material M   H . So that B   H and  is called the magnetic susceptibility of the
material. The three quantities,  , the relative magnetic permeability  r , and the magnetic
permeability  are related as follows:
  0  r r  1  

9. Magnetic materials are broadly classified as: diamagnetic, paramagnetic, and ferromagnetic. For
diamagnetic materials  is negative and small and for paramagnetic materials it is positive and

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 167
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

small. Ferromagnetic materials have large  and are characterised by non-linear relation between B
and H. They show the property of hysteresis.

10. Substances, which at room temperature, retain their ferromagnetic property for a long period of time
are called permanent magnets.

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM

1. The total force on a charge q moving with velocity v in the presence of magnetic and electric fields B
and E, respectively is called the Lorentz force. It is given by the expression:
F  q  v  B  E
The magnetic force q (v  B) is normal to v and work done by it is zero.

2. A straight conductor of length l and carrying a steady current I experiences a force F in a uniform
external magnetic field B.
F=IlxB
the direction of 1 is given by the direction of the current.

3. In a uniform magnetic field B, a charge q executes a circular orbit in a plane normal to B. Its
frequency of uniform circular motion is called the cyclotron frequency and is given by:
qB
vc 
2m
This frequency is independent of the particle’s speed and radius. This fact is exploited in a machine,
the cyclotron, which is used to accelerate charged particles.

4. The Biot-Sauart law asserts that the magnetic field dB due to an element dl carrying a steady current
I at a point P at a distance r from the current element is:
 dl  r
dB  0 I 3
4 r
To obtain the total field at P, we must integrate this vector expression over the entire length of the
conductor.

5. The magnitude of the magnetic field due to a circular coil of radius R carrying a current I at an axial
distance x from the centre is
 0 IR 2
B 3/ 2
2x2  R 2 
0I
At the center this reduces to B 
2R

6. Ampere’s Circuital Law: Let an open surface S be bounded by a loop C. Then the Ampere’s law
states that  B.dl   0 I where I refers to the current passing through S. The sign of I is determined
C

from the right-hand rule. We have discussed a simplified form of this law. If B is directed along the
tangent to every point on the perimeter L of a closed curve and is constant in magnitude along
perimeter then.
I
BL  0
2 R
Where I e is the net current enclosed by the closed circuit.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 168
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

7. The magnitude of the magnetic field at a distance R from a long, straight wire carrying a current I is
mI
given by: B  0
2 R
The field lines are circles concentric with the wire.

8. The magnitude of the field B Inside a long solenoid carrying a current I is

B   0 nI
where n is the number of turns per unit length. For a toroid one obtains,
 NI
B 0
2r
where N is the total number of turns and r is the average radius.

9. Parallel currents attract and anti-parallel currents repel.

10. A planar loop carrying a current I. having N closely wound turns, and an area A possesses a magnetic
momentum where,
mN IA
and t he direction of m is given by the right-hand thumb rule : curl the palm of your right hand along
the loop with the fingers pointing in the direction of the current. The thumb sticking out gives the
direction of m (and A)
When this loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field B. the force F on it is: F=Q
And the torque on it is,
  mB
In a moving coil galvanometer, this torque is balanced by a counter-torque due to a spring, yielding
  NI AB
where  is the equilibrium deflection and  the torsion constant of the spring.

11. An electron moving around the central nucleus has a magnetic moment p, given by:
e
1  l
2m
where l is the magnitude of the angular momentum of the circulating electron about the central
nucleus. The smallest value of 1 is called the Bohr magneton B and it is B  9.27  1024 J / T

12. A moving coil galvanometer can be converted into a ammeter by introducing a shunt resistance rs , of
small value in parallel. It can be converted into a voltmeter by introducing a resistance of a large
value in series.
MAGNETICS
FORMULLA SUMMARY
 Biot –Savart’s Law:
Field due to an infinitesimal current carrying element,

  o id   r
dB  
4 r 3 X

 i 
(1) B  0 sin   sin  i
4 x
,   90 0
For an infinite long wire ,i.e. ,  i
B 0
2x x

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 169
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

i
(2) Circular arc
 i
B 0 R 
4R

For a circular loop ,   2

 i
B  0
2R

 0 NiR 2
(3) B  along axis

2 R 2  Z2  3/2
i

Z B
N: no of turns
i
(4) Long Solenoid
B   0 ni, at all points within the solenoid
B=0 out side.
(a) Direction : Curl fingers of right hand in direction of i, Thumb points in the direction of field
(b) n : turns per unit length A

General Formula :
 ni
B at po int A  0 (cos  l  cos  2 ) 1 2
2

(5) Toroid
 Ni
B 0 r  dis tan ce from the center
2r
 force per unit length between two long straight parallel wires carrying currents i1 and i2
 i i
F= 0 1 2
2 d
Induction in groups
LL
(a) series L = L1 + L2 (b) parallel L= 1 2
L1  L2

When mutual inductance is enclosed

(a) Series L = L1 + L2  2 m

(b) Parallel M = K L1L2

K is coefficient of coupling
= l for ‘light’ coupling

(6)Infinite sheet:
 K
B  0 at all points
2
K: current per unit length

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 170
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 Ampere’s Law :

 B.d    i
0 enc

Note: Valid only if electric field is constant within the loop

Force on a current carrying conductor, dF  id   B

An arbitrarily shaped wire can be replaced by a straight wire F  BiL

L
X

For a closed loop in a uniform magnetic field F=0  F   d F   i d   B  i  d   B  0

 Magnetic Dipole Moment

  NiA A : area vector N : no of loops

 Magnetic dipole in a uniform magnetic field

Torque :     B
Potential energy V  .B
Force : 0

 For non uniform B , a force acts

B
Fx = -  .
x
 q
  L : angular momentum,  : magnetic moment
L 2m

 Lorentz force
F  q E  q ( V  B)

 In absence of electric field , if

(i) V is not perpendicular to B particle follows helical path

mV sin  2mv cos 
r pitch 
qB qB
2m
Distance moved in one time period = V.T. =V.
qB

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 171
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020


(ii) V perpendicular to B  circle in a plane perpendicular to B, of radius,
mv qB
r ,
qB m

Note :
For electromagnetic waves,
(i) E 0  B 0 c
1
(ii)  c2
 0 0

ELECTRO MAGNETIC INDUCTION

CONCEPT SUMMARY

1. The magnetic flux through a surface of area A placed in a uniform magnetic field B is defined as,
 B  B.A  BA cos 
where  is the angle between B and A.

2. Faraday’s laws of induction imply that the emf induced in a coil of N turns is directly related to the
rate of change of flux through it,
d B
  N
dt
Here  B is the flux linked with one turn of the coil. If the circuit is closed, a current 1=  /R is set
up in it. where R is the resistance of the circuit.

3. Lenz’s law states that the polarity of the induced emf is such that it tends to produce a current which
opposes the change in magnetic flux that produces it. The negative sign in the expression for
Faraday’s law indicates this fact.

4. When a metal rod of length l is placed normal to a uniform magnetic field B and moved with a
velocity v perpendicular to the field, the induced emf (called motional emf) across its ends is
  Blv

5. Changing magnetic fields can set up current loops in nearby metal (any conductor) bodies. They
dissipate electrical energy as heat. Such currents are called eddy currents.

6. Inductance Is the ratio of the flux-linkage to current. It is equal to N / I .

7. A changing current in a coil (coil 2) can induce an emf in a nearby coil (coil 1). This relation is given
dI
by, 1   M12 2
dt
The quantity M12 is called mutual inductance of coil 1 with respect to coil 2. One can similarly
define M. There exists a general equality. M12  M 21

8. When a current in a coil changes, it induces a back emf in the same coil. The self-induced emf is
given by,
dI
  L
dt
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 172
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

L is the self-inductance of the coil. It is a measure of the inertia of the coil against the change of
current through it.

9. The self-inductance of a long solenoid, the core of which consists of a magnetic material of
permeability 1 , is given by
L   r 0 n 2 A l
where A is the area of cross-section of the solenoid, l its length and n the number of turns per unit
length.

10. In an ac generator mechanical energy is converted to electrical energy by virtue of electromagnetic

induction. If coil of N turn and area A is rotated at v revolutions per second in a uniform magnetic
field B. then the motional emf produced is
  NBA  2v  sin  2 vt 
where we have assumed that at time t  0 s , the coil is perpendicular to the field.

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

FORMULA SUMMARY
d
E ind =  N B ,  B   B .dA
dt
EMF can be induced by
(1) varying magnetic field
(2) varying area
(3) varying angle between B & A

Motional emf = -  B Vd   v  B . d

For a rod moving perpendicular to its length (fig 1) E = BV 


B v

Motional emf in arbitrarily shaped wire acb is same as that in straight wire
ab E = Bv  

Bw 2
In a rotating bar ,  
2
Motional emf is the preferred approach when a conductor moves in a magnetic field But, if
d
conductor is stationary ,use e  
dt

 Follow this algorithm

Take velocity as parameter  induced emf  current  magnetic force  retardation .
Thus , get a relation between v & a
Note :
Lenz’s law : The magnetic force due to induced emf always opposes its cause.
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 173
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 Changing B leads to induced E.

B is cont. within circle of rod R.
Magnitude wise,
d
=
dt
d 2
  E . dl  dt ( B . r )
dB
 E ( 2r) = r2
dt
dB r
 E= . ,rR
dt 2
dB R 2
E=  ,r>R
dt 2r
dB
 Induced emf in rod CD due to changing magnetic field B(t) is . Area (OEABFO)
dt

 Self & Mutual Induction :

N di
L= and  = - N L
I dt

For a solenoid
L = 0 n2 Sl = 0 nNS
S : area of C.S.
N : total turns
l : Length
n : turns per unit length
N  N
M12 = M 21 = 2 2  1 1
I1 I2
where  2 : flux in 2 due to current in 1
di
2  M  N2
dt

 RC CIRCUITS

Charging : V = iR +Q/C
q=q0 (1-e-t/Rc)
i = i0 e-t/RC

Discharging: q = q 0 e-t/Rc
i = i0 e-t/RC

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 174
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 LR CIRCUITS
Rzz L
di
V = Ir + L
dt
i= i0 (1-e –tR/L) growth of current
i = io e-tR/L : decay of current
Li 2
Energy stored in inductor =  Lidi  + –
2
2
B V
Energy density =
2 0

 LC CIRCUITS
1
q= q0 cos t    ,  =
L eq C eq

No energy (heat, etc.) is dissipated

 While applying KVL across, inductor, remember that an inductor opposes the change in the current
flowing through it

i L
VA VB

di
Then, VA-VB = L
dt

(i) At t= 0 , replace capacitor by short circuit and inductance by open circuit.

(ii) When steady state is attained , replace capacitor by open circuit and inductors by short circuit.

(iii) For complex circuit ( L , R ) like

R R

E R L
3R
To find time constant , short the battery and find Req about L, Req =
2
L 2L
= 
R eq 3R
E
at steady state find current through inductor, i0 =
3R
iL = i0 ( 1 – e-t/ )
use similar method for complex RC circuits.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 175
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ALTERNATING CURRENT

CONCEPT SUMMARY
1. An alternating voltage v  v m sin t applied to a resistor R drives a current i = i m sin t in the
v
resistor i m  m . The current is in phase with the applied voltage.
R

2. For an alternating current i  i m sin t passing through a resistor R. the average power loss P
(averaged over a cycle) due to joule heating is 1/ 2  t 2m R . To express it in the same form as the dc
power  P  I 2 R  , a special value of current is used. It is called root mean square (rms) current and is
donoted by I:
i
I  m  0.707i m
2
Similarly, the rms voltage Is defined by
v
V  m  0.707 vm
2
We have P  IV  I 2 R

3. An ac voltage v  vm sin t applied to a pure inductor L. drives a current in the inductor

i  i m sin  t   / 2  , where i m  vm / X L . X L  L is called inductive reactance. The current in the
inductor lags the voltage by  / 2 . The average power supplied to an inductor over one complete
cycle is zero.

4. An ac voltage v  v m sin t applied to a capacitor drives a current in the capacitor :

v 1
i  i m sin     / 2  . Here, i m  m , X C  is called capacitive reactance.
XC C
The current through the capacitor is  / 2 ahead of the applied voltage. As in the case of inductor, the
average power supplied to a capacitor over one complete cycle is zero.

5. For a series RLC circuit driven by voltage v  v m sin t , the current is given by i  i m sin  t   
vm XC  X L
where i m  and   tan 1
R 2   XC  XL 
2
R
2
Z  R 2   X C  X L  is called the impedance of the circuit.
The average power loss over a complete cycle is given by
P  V I cos 
The term cos  is called the power factor.

6. In a purely Inductive or capacitive circuit, cos   0 and no power is dissipated even though a current
is flowing in the circuit. In such cases, current is referred to as a wattless current.

7. The phase relationship between current and voltage in an ac circuit can be shown conveniently by
representing voltage and current by rotating vectors called phasors. A phasor is a vector which

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 176
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

rotates about the origin with angular speed  . The magnitude of a phasor represents the amplitude or
peak value of the quantity (voltage or current) represented by the phasor.
The analysis of an ac circuit is facilitated by the use of a phasor diagram.

8. An interesting characteristic of a series RLC circuit is the phenomenon of resonance. The circuit
exhibits resonance, i.e., the amplitude of the current is maximum at the resonant frequency.
1 L 1
0  . The quality factor Q defined by Q  0  is an indicator of the sharpness of the
LC R 0CR
resonance. the higher value of Q indicating sharper peak in the current.

9. A circuit containing an Inductor L and a capacitor C (initially charged) with no ac source and no
resistors exhibits free oscillations. The charge q of the capacitor satisfies the equation of simple
harmonic motion:
d 2q 1
 q0
dt 2 LC
1
and therefore, the frequency  of free oscillation is 0  . The energy in the system oscillates
LC
between the capacitor and the t Inductor but their sum or the total energy is constant in time.

10. A transformer consists of an iron core on which are bound a primary coil of N P turns and a
secondary coil of Ns turns. If the primary coil is connected to an ac source, the primary and
secondary voltages are related by
N 
Vs   s  VP
N 
 p
and the currents are related by
N 
Is   p  I p
 Ns 
If the secondary coil has a greater number of turns than the primary, the voltage is stepped-up
 Vs  Vp  . This type of arrangement is called a step-up transformer. If the secondary coil has turns
less than the primary, we have a step-down transformer.

ALTERNATING CURRENT

FORMULA SUMMARY
T

V
0
0 cos wt.dt
2V0
(1) Vavg = T
  0.637 V0

 dt
0

T 1/ 2
 
  V02 cos 2 wt.dt 
  V0
VRMS = 0 T    0.707 V0
  2
  dt 
 0 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 177
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

VRMS
1.11
Vavg

1
(2) Xc = , X L  wL , X R  R
wc

(3) z= X r 2  ( X c  X L )2

(4) When V=V0 sin wt,

i = i0 sin wt  
 Xc  X L 
 phase difference = tan –1  
 XR 

X L Xc
(5) Quality Factor Q = 
R R

(6) Pavg = V RMS IRMS cos  power factor

Note :
Current /Voltage mentioned are always to be taken as RMS values, unless otherwise specified.

 Combinations of inductors :
Series : L eq   L i
i

1 1
Parallel : 
L eq i L i
Note :
Phasors
(1) Decide the common parameter ( V or I )
Series I Parallel V
(2) Draw the phasor representing the other parameter.
E leads I in L , I leads E in C

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

CONCEPT SUMMARY
1. Maxwell found an inconsistency in the Ampere’s law and suggested the existence of an additional
current, called displacement current, to remove this inconsistency. This displacement current is due
to time-varying electric field and is given by
d E
id   0
dt
and acts as a source of magnetic field in exactly the same way as conduction current.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 178
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

2. An accelerating charge produces electromagnetic waves. An electric charge oscillating harmonically

with frequency v, produces electromagnetic waves of the same frequency v. An electric dipole is a
basic source of electromagnetic waves.

3. Electromagnetic waves with wavelength of the order of a few metres were first produced and
detected in the laboratory by Hertz in 1887. He thus verified a basic prediction of Maxwell’s
equations.

4. Electric and magnetic fields oscillate sinusoidally in space and time in an electromagnetic wave. The
oscillating electric and magnetic fields, E and B are perpendicular to each other, and to the direction
of propagation of the electromagnetic wave. For a wave of frequency v, wavelength  , propagating
along z-direction, we have
E  E x  t   E 0 sin  kz  t 
 z    z t 
 E 0 sin  2   vt    E 0 sin  2    
      T 
B  By  t   B0 sin  kz  t 
 z    z t 
 B0 sin  2   vt    B0 sin  2     
      T 
They are related by E 0 / B0  c .

5. The speed c of electromagnetic wave in vacuum is related to 0 and  0 (the free space permeability
and permittivity constants) as follows:
c  1/  0 0 . The value of c equals the speed of light obtained from optical measurements. Light is
an electromagnetic wave: c is, therefore. also the speed of light, Electromagnetic waves other than
light also have the same velocity c in The speed of light, or of electromagnetic waves in a material
medium is free space.
The speed of light, or of electromagnetic waves in a material medium is given by v  1/  where
 is the permeability of the medium and c its permittivity.

6. Electromagnetic waves carry energy as they travel through space and this energy is shared equally by
the electric and magnetic fields.
Electromagnetic waves transport momentum as well. When these waves stikes a surface. If total
energy transferred to a surface in time t is U, total momentum delivered to this surface is p  U / c .

7. The spectrum of electromagnetic waves stretches. In principle, over an infinite range of wavelengths.
Different regions are known by different regions are known by different names:  -rays, X-rays,
ultraviolet rays. visible rays, infrared rays, microwaves and radio waves in order of increasing
o
wavelength from 10 2 A or 10-12 m to 10 6 m.
They interact with matter via their electric and magnetic fields which set in oscillation charges
present in all matter. The detailed interaction and so the mechanism of absorption, scattering. etc.,
depend on the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave, and the nature of the atoms and molecules in
the medium.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 179
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. In an LR circuit current at t = 0 is 20A. After 2s it reduces to 18A. The time constant of the
circuit is (in second) :
 10  2  10 
(a) In   (b) 2 (c) (d) 2In  
 9  10   9
In  
9

2. A magnet of magnetic moment M is freely suspended in a uniform magnetic field of strength B.

The work done in rotating the magnet through an angle  is given by
(a) B M (b) M B sin  (c) M B cos  (d) M B (1 – cos  )

3. The magnetic field lines due to a bar magnet are correctly shown is
(a) (b)
N N

S S

(c) (d)
N N

S S

4. A dip circle is so set that the dip - needle moves freely in the magnetic meridian. In this position,
the angle of dip is 390. Now the dip circle is rotated so that the plane in which the needle moves
makes an angle of 300 with the magnetic meridian. In this position, the needle will dip by an
angle
(a) exactly 390 (b) 300 (c) more than 390 (d) less than 390

5. A particle of charge q and mass m starts moving from the origin under the action of an electric field
   5
E = E0 iˆ and B =B0 iˆ with a velocity v = v0 ĵ . The speed of the particle will become v0 after a
2
time
m v0 mv0 3 m v0 m v0
(a) (b) (c) (d)
q E0 2q E0 2q E0 4q E0

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 180
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

6. A conducting slider of mass m is free to slide on a U-shaped frame. Electrical resistance of the frame
is constant and there exists a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the frame. The
slider is given an initial velocity v0 along arms of the frame. Select the wrong statement

(a) Speed of the slider will continuously decrease.

(b) The slider will cover infinite distance till it comes to rest.
(c) The slider will take infinite time to come to rest.
1
(d) Total heat generated in the frame is mv 20
2

7. The magnetic field due to a current carrying loop of radius 3cm at a point on its axis at a distance
4cm from the center is 54T . What will be its value at the centre of the loop?
(a) 250T (b) 150T (c) 125T (d) 75T

8. A rectangular loop has a sliding connector PQ of length l and resistance R and it is moving with a
speed  as shown in figure. The set-up is placed in a uniform magnetic field going into the plane of
the paper. The three currents I1 , I 2 and I are
P I


R R R
I I2
I1 Q
Bl  2Bl  Bl  2Bl 
(a) I1  I 2  ,I  (b) I1  I 2  ,I 
R R 3R 3R
Bl  Bl  Bl 
(c) I1  I2  I  (d) I1  I2  ,I 
R 6R 3R
 a a 
9. Co-ordinates of four corners of a square loop are A  (0, 0, 0), B  (0, 0, a), C   , , a  and
 2 2 
 a a 
D  , , 0  . A current I is flowing in the loop in ABCDA direction. The magnetic moment of
 2 2 
the loop will be
 a 2 ˆ a2 ˆ   a2 ˆ a2 ˆ
(a)  j kI (b)   i j I
 2 2   2 2 
 a2 ˆ a 2 ˆ   a2 ˆ a2 ˆ
(c)  i j I (d)  i j I
 2 2   2 2 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 181
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

10. The current i in an induction coil varies with time t according to the graph shown in the figure.
Which of the following graphs shows the induced emf (E) in the coil with time
i

O t

E E

(a) (b)

O O t
t
E
E

(c) (d)
O
t O
t
(c)

11. A wire carrying a current i from O to A is placed inside a uniform magnetic field B   B0 kˆ . The
shape of the wire is parabolic and has equation and has equation Y  2x  x 2 . The force on the wire
will be
Y
x x x x x
x x x xB x
x x x x x
i
x i
x x x x
O A
X
x x x x x
z
(a) F  2B0i , upwards (b) F  2B0i , downwards
(c) F  4B0i , upwards (d) F  4B0i , downwards

12. A resistor of resistance R, an inductor of inductance L and a capacitor of capacitance C are connected
in series and the combination is connected to a battery of emf  as shown. At t = 0, the switch S is
closed. Let, after a very long time, the thermal energy developed in circuit be Q, energy stored in
circuit be U and energy supplied by battery be E. Then
C

R L

 S
(a) Q : U : E  1:1: 2 (b) Q : U : E  1: 3 : 4 (c) Q : U : E  3 :1: 4 (d) Q : U : E  1: 2 : 3

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 182
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

13. In the circuit shown switch is connected to 1 for a very long time. At a particular instant t = 0, switch
L
is shifted to 2, the current in the circuit after a time gap of is
R
2 L

2L R

E
 3 3 
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 Re R Re R

14. The region between x = 0 and x = L is filled with uniform magnetic field B0 k̂ . A particle of mass
m positive charge q and velocity v0 î travels along x-axis and enters the region of the magnetic field
at origin. (Neglect gravity). If the particle emerges from the region of magnetic field with its velocity
at an angle 30 to its initial. If the magnetic field is reduced to half of the initial value then the angle
of emergence will become
(a) sin-1(1/4) (b) 60 (c) 90 (d) sin-1(1/2)

15. A large plate with uniform surface charge density  is moving with constant speed v as shown in the
figure. The magnetic field at a small distance from plate is

v

 0 v
(a) 0v parallel to plate (b) parallel to plate
2

 0 v
(c) 0v normal to plate (d) normal to plate
2

16. A spatially uniform magnetic field B exists in the circular region S and this field is decreasing in
magnitude with time at a constant rate. The wooden ring C1 (inner) and the conducting ring C2
(outer) are concentric with the magnetic field. The magnetic field is
perpendicular to the plane of the figure. Then
(a) there is no induced electric field in C1.
(b) there is an induced electric field in C1 and its magnitude is greater than the C 1
C 2
magnitude of the induced electric field in C2.
(c) there is an induced electric field in C2 and its magnitude is greater than the
induced electric field in C1.
(d) there is no induced electric field in C1.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 183
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

17. The circuit shown in the figure is allowed to reach steady state and L
then a soft iron core is inserted in the coil such that the coefficient of
self-inductance changes from L to nL. The current in the circuit at the R
time of complete insertion is + 
(a) E / R (b) E/nR
(c) nE / R (d) Zero

18. A long straight wire is carrying current I1 in +z direction. The x − y plane contains a closed circular
loop carrying current I2 and not encircling the straight wire. The force on the loop will be
(a) 0 I1I2 2 (b)  0 I1I 2 4
(c) Zero
(d) depends on the distance of the centre of the loop from the wire

19. A uniform electric field in the y direction and uniform magnetic field in the x direction exists in
free space. A particle of mass and carrying charge is projected from the origin withspeed along
the x – axis. The speed of particle as a function of its y co-ordinate will be
(a) V02  2q Ey m (b) V02  qEy m

(c) V02  2qE y m (d) V0  2qEy m

20. In a moving coil galvanometer the number of turns N = 24, area of the coil A  2  103 m 2 and the
magnetic field strength B = 0.2 T. To increase its current sensitivity by 25% we
(a) Increase B to 0.3 T (b) Decrease A to 1.5 103 m 2
(c) Increase N to 30 (d) None of the above.

21. Two strong bar magnets A and B are placed on a horizontal table such that the axis of B intersects A
at mid-point as shown in figure. B is fixed while A is free to move. There are no magnetic fields
except those due to A and B. Then A will
(a) rotate but not move towards or away from B
(b) rotate and move towards B
(c) move towards B and not rotate
(d) rotate and move away from B

22. A wire is placed between the poles of two fixed bar magnets as shown. A small current in the wire is
into the plane of the paper. The direction of the magnetic force on the wire is

(a) Towards N – pole (b) Towards S – pole

(c)Towards right (d)Towards left

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 184
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

23. A massless charged particle is at rest in a uniform magnetic field B

which is directed as shown in the figure. A man moving with a
speed v observes the charged particle to move w.r.t him in a straight
horizontal line with the same speed v. What is the electric field
observed by the man in the region?
(a) vB upwards (b) vB downwards
(c) Zero (d) vB towards left

24. The speed of a charged particle moving in space increases. Which of the following statements is
correct?
(a) A conservative electric field must be present at the location of particle
(b) A non-uniform magnetic field constant with time must be present at the location of particle
(c) If conservative electric field is not present then a time varying magnetic field must be present at
the location of particle
(d) None of these

25. A long hollow tube is carrying an electric current along its length distributed uniformly on its
circumference. The magnetic field
(a) increases linearly from the axis to the surface
(b) is constant inside the tube
(c) is zero only on the axis
(d)is zero just out-side the tube

26. A current carrying rod AB is placed perpendicular to an infinitely long current carrying wire as
shown in the figure. The point at which the conductor should be hinged so that it will not rotate is
(a) C
(b) Somewhere between B and C
(c) A
(d) Somewhere between A and C

27. Two observers moving with different velocities see that a point charge produces same magnetic field

at some point A in space. If r is the position vector of point A relative to the point charge then

(a) Their relative velocity must be parallel to r

(b) Their velocities must be parallel to r

(c) Their relative velocity must be perpendicular to r

(d) Their velocities must be perpendicular to r

28. There exists a uniform magnetic and electric field of magnitude 1 T and 1 V/m respectively along
positive y-axis. A charged particle of mass 1 kg and of charge 1 C is having velocity 1 m/s along the
positive x-axis. At t = 0 it is at origin. Then the approximate co-ordinates of the particle at time
seconds willbe
(a) (0,10,2) (b) (0,-5,-2) (c) (0,5,-2) (d) (0,5,2)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 185
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

29. When the current in a certain inductor coil is 5 A and is increasing at the rate of 10A/s, the potential
difference across the coil is 140 V. When the current is 5 A and decreasing at the rate of10 A/s, the
potential difference is 60 V. The self-inductance of the coil is
(a) 2 H (b) 8 H (c) 4 H (d) 12 H

30. The secondary coil of an ideal step down transformer is delivering 500 watt power at 12.5 A. If the
ratio of turns in the primary to the secondary is 5 : 1, then the current flowing in the primary coil will
be
(a) 5 A (b) 12.5 A (c) 0.4 A (d) 2.5 A

31. The dimensional formula of magnetic flux is

(a) MLT 3A 2 (b) ML2T2 A (c) ML2T2A 1 (d) ML2TA 1

32. A particle of specific charge  is released from origin with a velocity   0î in a uniform magnetic

field B  B0kˆ . If the particle passes through the point  0, y,0 , then, y equals
0 2 0 0 2 0
(a)  - (b)  (c) (d)
B0  B0  B0  B0 

33. A particle of mass m and charge q is projected towards negative x  axis with speed  from a

point  d,0,0  in a region of space where a uniform magnetic field B  B0ˆj exists. The maximum
value of  for which the particle does not hit the y  z plane is 0 . Then 0 equals
qB qBd qBd 2qB
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2md 2m m md

34. A current carrying square loop is placed near an infinitely long current carrying wire. The torque
acting on the loop is  equals

a
 0 I1I 2 a 0  I1I 2a  0 I1I 2 a
(a) Zero (b) (c)   (d) log e  2 
2 2  2  2

35. A battery is connected between two points A and D on the circumference of a uniform conducting
ring of radius r and resistance R . One of the arcs AD of the ring subtends an angle  at the centre.
The value of the magnetic induction at the centre due to current in the ring is

(a) proportional to 180    (b) inversely proportional to r

(c) zero, only if   180 (d) zero for all values of 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 186
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

36. A thin flexible wire of length L is connected to two adjacent fixed points carries a current I in the
clockwise direction, as shown in the figure. When system is put in a uniform magnetic field of
strength B going into the plane of paper, the wire takes the shape of a circle. The tension in the wire
is
X X X X X

X X X X X

X X X X X

X X X X X

IBL IBL IBL

(a) IBL (b) (c) (d)
 2 4

37. Consider a wireframe shown in figure. Equal currents I flow through all the three branches of the
wire frame. The frame is a combination of two semicircles ACD and CDE of radius a. It is placed in
uniform magnetic field B acting perpendicular to the plane of frame. The magnitude of magnetic
force acting on the frame is
A

C D

(a) 6BIa (b) 3BIa (c) BIa (d) ZERO

38. A current I flows along the length of an infinitely long straight, thin-walled pipe. Then
(a) the magnetic field at all points inside the pipe is the same, but not zero
(b) the magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero
(c) the magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the pipe
(d) the magnetic field is different at different points inside the pipe

39. The pressure experienced by the lateral surface of a long straight solenoid having n turns per unit
length carrying a current I through it is P. then
 2 I 2  n 2 I2  2 I2
(a) P  02I2 (b) P  0 (c) P  0 (d) P  0
2 3 4

40. A straight conductor of mass m and carrying a current I is hinged at one end B

and placed in a plane perpendicular to the magnetic field of intensity B as
shown in the figure. At any moment if the conductor is let free, then the
angular acceleration of the conductor will be (neglect gravity)
IB 2 IB 3IB IB
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2m m 2m 3m L

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 187
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

41. A conducting rod of length and mass m is moving down a smooth inclined plane of inclination 
E

60
O B

with constant velocity  . A current I is flowing in the conductor in a direction perpendicular to paper

inwards and a vertically upward magnetic field B exists in space. Then
I

B


 mg  mg cos   mg
(a) s (b) B  sin  (c) B  (d) B 
Il II I sin 

42. Figure shows square current carrying loop ABCD of side 2 m and current

I  0.5A . The magnetic movement M of the loop is
 
(a) ˆj  kˆ Am 2 (b)  3iˆ  kˆ  Am2
(c)  ˆi  3kˆ  Am 2 (d)  ˆi  kˆ  Am 2

43. Two particles A and B of masses m A and m B respectively and having

A
the same charge are moving in a plane. A uniform magnetic field exists B
perpendicular to this plane. The speed of the particles are A and B
respectively and the trajectories are as shown in the figure. Then
(a) mA A  mBB (b) mA A  mBB
(c)mA < mB and A   (d) mA  mB and A  B

Y
44. A conductor PQ of length L, carries a current I. PQ is placed I
P Q
perpendicular to a long straight conductor XY carrying a current i as
shown. The force acting on PQ is F.
i L L
 Ii  Ii
(a) F  0 ln 2 ; upwards (b) F  0 ln 2; downwards 2
2 2
 0 Ii  0 Ii
(c) F  ln 3; upwards (d) F  ln 3; downwards X
2 2

45. An electron moves straight inside a charged parallel plate capacitor of

uniform surface charge density  . The space between the plates is filled

with constant magnetic field of induction B . The time of straight line
motion of the electron in the capacitor is
e  IB e  B
(a) (b) 0 (c) (d) 0
 0 IB  0 B e 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 188
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

46. The figure shows certain wire segments joined together to form a
x c x x x d x
coplanar loop. The loop is placed in a perpendicular magnetic field in
x a x b x
the direction going into the plane of the figure. The magnitude of the
x x x x
field increases with time. I1 and I 2 are the currents in the segments ab x
x x
and cd. Then, x x x
x x x x x
(a) I1 > I 2
(b) I1 < I 2 x x x x x

(c) I 1 is in the direction ba and I 2 is in the direction cd

(d) I 1 is the direction ab and I 2 is in the direction dc

47. A coil of inductance 8.4 mH and resistance 6 is connected to a 12 V battery. The current in the
coil is 1 A at approximately the time
(a) 500 s (b) 20 ms (c) 35 ms (d) 1 ms
x x x x
48. A circular conducting loop of radius R and resistance per unit length 
is placed in a magnetic field decreasing at a constant rate  . Two points x x x x
lying at the diametric ends are connected through a wire PQ. If I be the P Q
current in PQ then x x x x
R R
(a) I  from P to Q (b) I  from Q to P
2 2 x x x x
2R
(c) I  from P to Q (d) I = 0


49. A uniform but time-varying magnetic field B(t) exists in a circular region B(t)
x x x P
of radius a and is directed into the plane of the paper, as shown. The
magnitude of the induced electric field at point P at a distance r from the x x x x x r
centre of the circular region x x a x x
1 x x x x x
(a) is ZERO (b) decreasing as
r x x x
1
(c) increases as r (d) decreasing as 2
r

dB
50. The magnetic flux density B is changing in magnitude at a constant rate . A given mass m of
dt
copper, drawn into a wire of radius a and formed into a circular loop of radius r is placed
perpendicular to the field B. the induced current in the loop is i. The resistivity of copper is  and
density is d.
m dB m dB m dB m dB
(a) i  (b) i  2
(c) i  (d) i 
4d dt 4 a r dt 4ad dt 2d dt

51. A circular loop of radius a is placed in the same plane as a long straight wire
carrying a current I. The centre of the loop is at a distance r from the wire where r >>
a. The loop is moved away from the wire with a constant velocity v. The induced
emf in the loop is a
 Iv  Ia 2v  Ia 2v  Ia 3v
(a)   0 (b)   0 2 (c)   0 2 (d)   0 3
2 2r 2r 2r

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 189
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

52. The power factor of the circuit shown in the figure is

R  20  X C  20  X L  100 

220 V, 50 Hz 40 
(a) 0.2 (b) 0.4 (c) 0.6 (d) 0.8

53. An equilateral triangular loop ADC of side length 2a, having resistance R is pulled with a constant
velocity v out of a uniform magnetic field directed into the paper. At time t = 0, side DC of the loop
is at edge of the magnetic field. The induced current (I) versus time (t) graph will be as
v

x C x x D x

x x x x

x x x x
A
x x x x
I
I

(a) t (b)
t

I I
(c) (d)

t t


54. A rectangular loop with a sliding connector of length l = 2 m is B
situated in a uniform magnetic field B = 2 T perpendicular to the x
plane of loop. Resistance of connector is r = 2  . Two resistances of
6  and 3  are connected as shown in figure. The external force 6  v 3
required to keep the connector moving with a constant velocity
v  4 ms1 is
(a) 4 N (b) 8 N (c) 16 N (d) 32 N

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 190
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

55. The equivalent inductance of the network shown here is

4H 2H

5H 3H 1H

(a) 2.619 H (b) 9.126 H (c) 6.219 H (d) 1.296 H

56. In the loop PQRSTUWP shown in figure, a conducting wire x x x Q x x S x

P
QU of mass m, length l is moved with a constant velocity v
x x x x x x
towards left. The complete circuit is placed in a uniform
 R
inward magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of loop. V C
The current in the branch QSTU is x x x x x x
Blv B lC W
(a) , clockwise (b) , anticlockwise x x x U x x T x
R R
B lC v
(c) , clockwise (d) ZERO
R

57. A steady potential difference of 10 V produces heat at a rate x in a resistor. The peak value of the
x
alternating voltage which will produce heat at a rate in the same resistor is
2
(a) 5 V (b) 5 2 V (c) 10 V (d) 10 2v

58. The rate of heat production in a resistor due to an alternating current of rms value 10 A is same as
that due to a direct current of
10
(a) 10 A (b) A (c) 10 2 A (d) 5 A
2

59. Consider a series LR combination connected to a battery of constant emf E and switch S in series.
The switch S is closed at time t = 0. If  denotes the induced emf across inductor and I the current in
the circuit at any time t. the graph showing the variation of  with I is

(a) (b) 

I
I

(c)  (d)


I I

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 191
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

60. A conducting rod XY of length L = 0.5 m is moving with a uniform speed v  4 ms 1 in a uniform
magnetic field B = 2T directed into the paper. A capacitor of capacity C = 5 F is connected as
shown in figure. Then

x x x X x x

x1 x x x x
v
2 x
x x x x

x x x Y x x

(a) charge stored in the capacitor increases exponentially with time

(b) q1  q2  0
(c) q1  20 C and q2  20 C
(d) q1  20 C and q2  20 C R

61. In the circuit shown, A is joined to B for a long time, and A is joined to C. the 2L
A C
total heat produced in R is B
LE 2 LE 2 LE 2 LE 2 +
(a) (b) (c) (d)
R2 2R 2 4R 2 8R 2 E 2R
Y

62. A coil carrying a steady current is short-circuited. The current in it decreases  times t 0 . The time
constant of the circuit is  .
t0 t0 t0
(a)   t 0 ln  (b)   (c)   (d)  
 ln   1


63.  
A conductor AB of length l moves in XY plane with velocity v = v0 ˆi  ˆj . A magnetic field

 
B  B0 ˆi  ˆj exists in the region. The induced emf is

(a) 2B0lv0 (b) 2B0lv0 (c) B0lv0 (d) ZERO

64. A metal disc of radius a rotates with a constant angular velocity  about its axis. Assuming, m and e
to be the mass and charge of electron, the potential difference between the centre and the rim of the
disc is
1  m2a 2   m2a 2  2m2a 2 4m2 a 2
(a)   (b)   (c) (d)
2 e   e  e e

65. The time constant of the circuit shown in figure is 0.5 F

0.5 F
(a) 5 s (b) 10 s 10  10 
1
(c) s (d) 0.1 s
2
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 192
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

66. An AC voltage source of variable angular frequency  and fixed amplitude V connected in series
with a capacitance C and an electric bulb of resistance R (inductance zero). When  is increased
(a) the bulb glows dimmer
(b) the bulb glows brighter
(c) total impendence of the circuit is unchanged
(d) total impendence of the circuit increases

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Two particles having the same specific charges (q/m) enter a uniform magnetic field with the same
speed but at angles of 30 0 and 600 with the field. Let a, b and c be the ratios of their pitches and radii
and periods of their helical paths respectively, then
(a) abc = 1 (b) a  b  2 c (c) a 2  c (d) ab  c

2. The magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of conducting ring of radius r changes at the rate
dB
  . Then
dt
(a) Emf induced in the ring is r 2 
(b) Emf induced in the ring is 2 r
(c) the potential difference between diametrically opposite points on the ring is half of induced emf
(d) all points on the ring are at same potential

3. In the LCR circuit shown in figure

X C  20  R  10  X L  10 


V  400sin t
(a) current will lead the voltage
(b) rms value of current is 20 A
1
(c) power factor of the circuit is
2
(d) rms voltage drop across resistance is 200 V

4. Two long parallel conducting rails of zero resistance separated by a distance L are joined to a cell of
emf E at one end. An external uniform magnetic field B is applied normal to the plane and into the
plane of the rails as shown in the figure. A conducting bar of mass m and resistance R is placed
across the rails. The bar can slide freely parallel to itself always remaining perpendicular to the rails.
+ B
L
 E

E
(a) If at t = 0 velocity is zero then the terminal velocity (vT ) of the bar is
BL
(b) Current flowing through resistance at terminal velocity is zero
(c) The energy supplied by cell at any instant is partly dissipated as joule heating in the circuit and
the rest is used up in moving the bar.
(d) The speed of the bar decreases exponentially with a time constant of m R / L2 B2.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 193
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

5. Two concentric circular coils of radii R and r   R  carry currents of I1 and I 2 I 1

respectively. When the smaller coil, of mass m , is rotated slightly about one of its
diameter, it starts oscillating. If T is the period of oscillation, then I2
1 1
(a) T  (b) T  r 0 (c) T  (d) T  R
I1I2 m

6. Two long thin parallel conductors of mass density m1 and m 2 carry currents I1 and I 2
respectively. They are placed at a distance d . The force acting on a unit length of the first conductor
is F . Assuming second conductor to be fixed
(a) F  I1I2 and attractive for I1 and I2 flowing in the same direction
(b) F  I1I2 and repulsive for I1 and I 2 flowing in the opposite direction
1
(c) F 
d
 0I1I2
(d) The first conductor moves towards/ away from the second with an acceleration a 
2m1d

7. A particle having specific charge  moves with a velocity   0î in a magnetic field
 B
 
B  0 ˆj  k . It is observed that the
2
(a) path of the particle is a helix
(b) path of the particle is a circle
 0
(c) distance moved by particle in time t  is
B 0 B 0
   
(d) velocity of particle after time t  is  0 ˆi  0 ˆj 
3B0  2 2 
     
8. A proton, moving with velocity  ,enters a region of uniform E & B such that , E & B are
mutually perpendicular the proton is deflected along positive x  axis when either of the fields or
bothare switched on simultaneously. Which of the
 following supports the argument given above?
(a) B may be along negative y  axis (b) B may be along positive z  axis
 
(c) E is along positive x  axis (d)  may be along positive y  axis

9. A conductor PQRST, shaped as shown, carries a current I. Q

It is placed in the xy plane with the ends P and T on the I
a
x  axis. A uniform magnetic field of magnitude B exists
in the region. The force acting on it will be P R T
x
(a) zero, if B is in the x- direction a
(b)  IB in the z- direction, if B is in the y  direction
z
(c)  IB in the negative y  direction, if B is in the z  S

direction
(d) 2BIa if B is in the x  direction

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 194
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

10. For the situation shown, the correct statement (s) is/are
 I I I 1 1  M P
(a) The net force on the long straight wire is F  0 1 2 3   and
2  a a  b 
is repulsive I1 I 2 L
(b) The loop will be compressed
(c) No torque will be acting on the loop as the force experienced by the N O
wires of the loop lie in the plane of the loop. a
(d) No torque will be acting on the loop as the forces experienced by the b
wires of the loop are normal to the plane of the loop.
 
11. In a region having a uniform field B  B0ˆj , a proton is fired from origin with velocity   0ˆj  0kˆ .
The subsequent motion of the proton has the best description give by the following statement(s).
(a) Its x and z co-ordinates cannot be zero at the same time
(b) If y co-ordinate will be proportional to its time of flight
(c) Its x co-ordinates can never be negative
(d) Its x co- ordinate can never be positive

12. Non-zero uniform electric field and magnetic field coexist in a region of space. The path of a charged
particle in this region.
(a) may be a circle (b) cannot be a circle
(c) may be a helix (d) may be a straight line

13. A charged particle having mass m, charge q is moving with velocity    iˆ  ˆj in a magnetic field
 
B   ˆi  ˆj and experiences a force F . Which one of the following statement(s) is./are correct?
  
(a) F  0 for    (b) F   2 2 for   
 
(c) F acts along z  axis for    (d) F acts along y  axis for   

14. Two infinite plates carry j ampere of current out of the pager per unit width of the plate as shown.
BP and B Q represent magnitude of field at point P and Q respectively.

(a) BP  0 (b) BP  0ˆj (c) BQ  0 (d) BQ  0 ˆj

15. A rectangular coil C having N turns, length 2l, width l and resistance per unit length  is placed in a
uniform magnetic field of magnitude B. The plane of the coil is initially perpendicular to B. When
the coil is rotated by an angle  about the axis XY, a charge Q flows through it
NBl  2NBl
(a) Q  , for   (b) Q  , for   
3 2 3
2NBl 3 NBl
(c) Q  , for   (d) Q  , for   2
 2 6

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 195
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

16. A conducting rod of mass m, length l, free to rotate in a vertical plane, is


hinged at point O. There exists a uniform magnetic field B in 
horizontal direction. The rod is released form the position shown. The 
potential difference between the two ends of the rod, when it reaches a x B
position at an angle  below the initial position, is proportional to
(a) sin  (b) l 2 (c) B (d) l 3/2

17. A magnetic field B exists perpendicular to the plane of the paper in a cylindrical volume of radius R.
dB
If it is increasing at the rate , then electric field at a distance r from its centre is
dt
r  dB  r  dB 
(a) E     for r  R (b) E     for r  R
2  dt  4  dt 
R 2 dB r 2 dB
(c) E   for r  R (d) E   for r  R
2r dt 2R dt

18. A conducting rod PQ of length 8l is rotated about a point O at


distance 3l from P, in a uniform magnetic field B directed into the
paper. Then 
P Q
Bl 2 25
(a) VP  VO  (b) Bl 2
VO  VQ  O
2 2
2 9
(c) VP  VQ  8Bl (d) VO  VP  Bl 2
2

19. In the circuit shown if VR and A be the readings of the voltmeter and ammeter, then
R  100 

VL VC V
A 100 V 100 V

200 V, 50 Hz

(a) VR  300 V (b) A  1 A (c) VR  200 V (d) A = 2 A

20. In the circuit shown in figure. The steady state currents I1 and I 2 in the coils after the switch S is
closed are given by I1 L1

I2 L2

E R S

EL 2 EL1
(a) I1  (b) I1 
R  L1  L 2  R  L1  L 2 
EL2 EL1
(c) I2  (d) I2 
R L1L2 R  L1  L2 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 196
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

21. A conducting circular loop of radius a, resistance R, having resistance per unit length  is kept on ao
horizontal plane. A vertical time varying magnetic field horizontal plane. A vertical time varying
dq
magnetic field B = 2t is switched on at time t = 0. If P is the power generated in the coil, is the
dt
rate of flow of charge from any section of the coil, Q is the total charge passing through coil from
t = 0 to t = 3 s and  be the emf induced in the coil. Then
dq a 6 a 2 4 2 a 4
(a)   2 a 2 (b)  (c) Q  (d) P 
dt  R R

C
22. Consider three LC circuits, first with capacitance C, inductance L, second with capacitance ,
2
L
inductance 2L and third with capacitance 2C, inductance . All the three capacitors are charged to
2
the same potential V and then made to oscillate. The respective frequencies of the circuits are f 1 , f 2
and f 3 . Also the currents in the circuits have respective maximum values I1 , I 2 and I 3 . Then
f3
(a) f1  f 2  f 3 (b) f1  f 2  (c) I1  I 2 < I 3 (d) I 2  I1  I3
2
P Q
23. In the arrangement shown, an aluminium ring Q faces an
electromagnet P. the current I through P can be altered using a variable
resistor. Then
(a) P repels Q, when I increases (b) P attracts Q, when I increases I
(c) P repels Q, when I decreases (d) P attracts Q, when I decreases +

24. Which of the following statements(s) is/are correct regarding the nature of induced electric field
produced regarding the nature of induced electric field produced by a changing magnetic field?
(a) The lines of this field are closed curves
(b) It is non-electrostatic in nature
(c) A corresponding potential can be associated with this induced electric field
(d) It is non-conservative in nature

25. A capacitor is charged to a potential of V0 . It is connected with an inductor C L

through a switch S. The switch is closed at time t = 0. Which of the + -
following statements(s) is/are correct?
C
(a) The maximum current in the circuit is V0
L
(b) Potential across capacitor becomes zero for the first time at t   LC S
 1
(c) Energy stored in the inductor at time t  LC is CV02
2 2
1
(d) Maximum energy stored in the inductor is CV02
2

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 197
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ANSWER KEY

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (b)

6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (c)

11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (b)

16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (c)

21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (d) 25. (b)

26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (d)

31. (c) 32. (d) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (d)

36. (c) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (c)

41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (c) 45. (b)

46. (d) 47. (d) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (a)

51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (a)

56. (d) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (b) 60. (d)

61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (d) 64. (a) 65. (a)

66. (b)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (a, d) 2. (a, c) 3. (a, b, c, d) 4. (abcd) 5. (a,b,d)

6. (a,b,c,d) 7. (b,c) 8. (b,c,d) 9. (a,c) 10. (a,b,c)

11. (b,d) 12. (b,c,d) 13. (a,b,c) 14. (a,d) 15. (a,b)

16. (a,c,d) 17. (a,c) 18. (b,c,d) 19. (c,d) 20. (a,d)

21. (a,b,c,d) 22. (a,d) 23. (a,d) 24. (a,b,d) 25. (a,c,d)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 198
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

P – IX SOLUTION

SINGLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. i = i 0 e –t/L
18=20 e –2/L
solving this we get
2
L 
 10 
ln  
 9
3. The magnetic field lines due to a bar magnet are from N to S out - side the bar and
from S to N inside the bar respectively.

V V
4.  tan 39 and  tan 
H H cos 30
tan 300
  tan 
cos30

So,   390

5. (b)
5v0 2 v
Only vx will change because E is along X-axis. vx2 + v02 = orvx = 0
4 2
v0  qE  mv0
v = u + at or =0+   t or t =
2 m 2qE

6. (b)
BLv BIL B 2 L2v
I= and retardation, a  
R m mR
2 2 2 2
dv B L v B Ls mv R
v   v  v0  or v  0  s  2 0 2 (Finite)
ds mR mR B L
2 2
B Lt
dv B 2 L2v 
   v  v0e mR or v  0  t   (Infinite)
dt mR
Slider will come to rest when its KE is completely converted into heat.

7. Magnetic field at a distance x from the center of the coil of radius R and carrying a current I is
0 IR 2
B 32
(1)
2 R 2  x2 
Magnetic field at the center of the coil is  x  0
0 I
B0  (2)
2R
Dividing (1) by (1) we get
32
B0


R 2  x2 
B R3
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 199
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

8. When a wire of length l moves with a velocity  perpendicular to a magnetic field B, and emf
E  Bl is induced between its ends. Hence the equivalent circuit is as shown in figure. From
Kirchhoff’s junction rule
I1  I2  I
Applying Kirchhoff’s loop rule to loops abefa and bcdeb we have
E  IR  I1R  0 (1)
And I2 R  IR  E  0 (2)
Adding (1) and (2), we get I1  I2
Subtracting (1) and (2), we get
2E  2IR   I1  I 2  R  0
 2E  2IR  IR  0
2E 2Bl 
 I 
3R 3R
I Bl 
 I1  I 2  
2 3R

9. Area of square loop is a2

Magnetic moment is Ia2

Which is perpendicular to plane of square loop

  a2 ˆ a2 ˆ
M   i j I
 2 2 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 200
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Ldi
10. Induced emf   i
dt

t
e

11. (a)
y  2x  x 2  0 x  0, 2
 l eq= 2 iˆ , B   B0 kˆ
 
 F  il B
 2 B ˆi , upward ĵ
0 
12. (a)
Ldr q
Q : U : E  1:1: 2   5R   0
dt C
di Ld 2 r i LCd 2 dr
 R 2  0 2
 RC  i  0
dt dt C dt dt
2 2
 RC   RC   42C t  RC   RC   42C
 i  c, e  C 2e t
2LC 2LC
At t   , i  0
Ldi
or since max. value of   there cannot be back current in circuit i.e., I at  , will be zero.
dt
q2
Therefore at t   capacitor has energy stored , inductor energy O.
2C
q2
 Energy lost in Resistance  q   q 2 .
2c

13. (d)
Current will be  r

14. (a)
mv R1 B2 1
R= ;  
qB R2 B1 2
R1 R
R2 sin  = R1 sin 300 sin   sin 30 0  1
R2 2 R2
1
sin  
4

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 201
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

15. (b)
dx
Current flowing per unit length =  = v
dt


 0 v
By Ampere’s law B + B = 0v  B =
2

16. (b)
 2 2 dB
   R dt
E.d
B t 
db
E 2  r  R 2 
dt
d
2
R dB R
E 
2r dt r E
1
E 
r
 E C1  E C2

17. (b)
An inductor tries to keep the flux constant
E
 L  i nL
R
E
 i
nR

18. (c)
BQ
I2

I1 B
r
I2
P

The force at P is outward and the force at Q is inward. So net force on the entire loop is zero.

19. (a)
WB  0 WE  q Ey
mv 2 mv 20
  qEy
2 2
2qEy
V  V02 
m

20. (c)
K  BINA

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 202
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 BNA
S   current sensitivity
I K
S B S N S A
 ,  , 
S B S N S A
So if the current sensitivity is increased by 25% then we have increase B,N or A by the same amount
25%
 N should be increased to 30
30  24
100  25%
24

21. (b)
N
F
N S A
B
S
F
The initial torque will bring N closes towards S , and hence the magnet A will get attracted towards
magnet B.

22. (d)
  

F  i B 
Towards left

N

B i

23. (a)
FB  qBV  Down  FE  qE  UP 
If the particle travels without deviation , then q E  q V B
E  V B(upwards)

v q

24. (d)
The point where the particle is located an electric field can be produced by a time varying magnetic
field present at some other point

r
B t 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 203
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

25. (b)

Cross-section
of the tube

For such a symmetric configuration , the field is zero, every where inside the tube. Hence constant

26. (d)
Force

A C B

Since the point of application of magnetic force will be between A and C. Hence the rod should be
hinged between A and C.

27. (a)

V1  Velocity of 1st observer

V 2  Velocity of 2nd observer

VC  Velocity of change
 
  0 2 V  r
B 
4 r 3
    
  
 V C  V1  r  V C  V 2  r 
  

 V1  V 2  r  0 
Hence there relative velocity must be parallel to r .

28. (d)
The motion of the particle will be helical with increasing pitch.
2 m 2   1
T   2  sec
qB 11
In  seconds it will cover half the circle
x
1m s

z y


P1`

P2
 
P3


CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 204
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

mv
r
qB x
1
r  1m
1 1
z  2m x  0 t
1  qE  2 y
y     Z 2r
2 m  t0
1 1 1 2
 
2 1
2
y  5m  0,5, 2 
2

29. (c) R L
140  5R  10L A B
5A
60  5R  10L di di
 10 L
dt dt
80  20L
L  4H

30. (d)
p 5

s 1

i p p  is s  500 
is s 1
ip   12.5 
p 5
i p  2.5 A

31. (c)
Since F  BI 
 F  MLT 2
    MT 2 A 1
1   AL
Since     BA   MT 2 A 2 L2
    ML2 T 2 A 1

32. (d)
z
x

V0
 y
Fm (0,y,0)

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 205
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

2mv 0 2V0
y  2r  
qB0 B0 
q
where the specific charge  equals
m
33. (c)
Since the magnetic field is uniform and the particle is projected in a direction perpendicular to the
filed hence, it will describe a circular path. The particle will not hit the y  z plane only if the radius
of the circle happens to be smaller than d . For the maximum value of v the radius is just equal to d.
mv0
So, r  d 
qB
qBd
 v
m

34. (a)
Forces acting on the loop, due to I1 act in the plane of the loop and hence give zero torque

35. (d)
For a current flowing into a circular arc, the magnetic induction at the centre is
 I
B   0 
 4r  I 2

 B  I
In the given problem, the total current is divided into two arcs C
O
1 1 A 0
I 
resistance of arc length of arc I 1
D
1
 I
angle aubtended at centre  
 I  constant
i.e., magnetic field at centre due to arc AD is equal and opposite to the magnetic field at centre due to
arc ACD and hence the net magnetic field at centre is zero

36. (c)

 d 
2T sin    Id B
 2 
 d  BIL
 2T    IRdB  T  BIR 
 2  2

37. (a)
 
FCAD  FCED  BI eff  BI  2a 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 206
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

  
Net force on the frame is F  3FCD  F  6Bla

38. (b)
Using Ampere’s Circuital Law over a circular loop of any radius less than the radius of the pipe, we
can see that net current inside the loop is zero. Hence, magnetic field at every point inside the loop
will be zero.

39. (b)
Since B  0 nI
Also, we know that the magnetic energy density equals pressure
So,
2
B2  0nI   n 2I2
P   0
20 20 2

40. (c)
The force acting one elementary portion of the current carrying conductor is given as
dF  I  dx  b sin 90o  dF  BIdx
The torque applied by dF about O  d  xdF
 The total torque about O is  given by
   dt   x  BIdx 
L
IBL2 dF
   IB xdx 
0
2
O
The angular acceleration x
  dx
 
 Moment of Intertia   1 2 
   3 mL 
 or Rod about O   
 BIL2 
 
 2  3IB
 2

 mL  2m
 
 3 
41. (b)

Magnetic force Fm  BI acts in the direction shown in figure


B

BI
v=constant


Since the rod moves downwards with constant velocity, hence the net force on it is zero.

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 207
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

mI cos 
N

BI
B I  sin  
mg sin 
m g co s 
mg
 Fm cos   mg sin   BI cos   mg sin 
 mg 
 B  tan 
 I 

42. (c)
 
    
DA  2 cos 30 ˆi  2sin 30 kˆ   3iˆ  kˆ and AB  2 j
    1

Since, M  I DA  AB  
 M    3iˆ  kˆ  2ˆj 
2    
 
 M   3kˆ  ˆi 
 M  iˆ  3kˆ Am 2

43. (b)
Since rA  rB
 mv 
 m A vA  m B vB  r  
 qB 

44. (c)
Consider an element of length dx at a distance x for the wire
 I
Field at the elements is B  0
2x
If dF is the force experienced by the element then
dF  BIdx
dF is the force experienced by the element then
dF  BI dx
3L 2
 0iIU dx 0iI dx  0iI 3L 2
 dF   F   F nx L 2
2 x 2 L2
x 2
0II  3L 3L L  0iI
 F  n  n  n   F n3
2  2 2 2 2

45. (b)
The net electric field
 
E  E1  E 2
  
E  
2 0 2 0  0
The net force acting on the electron is zero because it moves with constant velocity, due to its motion
on straight line
    
 Fnet  Fe  Fm  0  Fe  F m

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 208
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

E 
 eE  evB v 
B 0 B
  0 B
 The time of motion inside the capacitor is t  
v 

46. (d)
Since magnetic field increases with time
So induced net flux should be outward i.e, current will flow from a to b.

x c x I2 x x d x
x a x b x
x x I1 x x
x
x x
x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x

47. (d)
 Rt
 
I  I 0 1  e L  , where
 
 
12
I 0  A  2A
6
 6t  6t

 3  1 8.4103
 1  2 1 e 8.410   e  n2
  2
 
 t  1.4  0.693 ms  t  0.97 ms

48. (d)
Since the inward field is decreasing at a constant rate, so the induced current
must be set up in the loop so that if does not allow the inward field to decrease.
Hence the induced current must set up an outward field. So, the induced P Q
current must flow in the loop in the Counter Clockwise sense. Due to this fact
no current flows through the branch PQ.

49. (b)
  d
 E.dr 
dt
dB 1 a 2 dB m dB
 2E  a 2   E 
dt 2 r dt 4 d dt

50. (a)
d
 {in magnitude}
dt
 1 d A dB
 i   BA  
R R dt R dt

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 209
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

where A  r 2  area of loop of radius r and R = resistance of the loop of length  2r  and area of
cross-section a 2
   2r 
 R 2 
a a 2
Further mass of wire is m  a 2    2r  d 
 i
 a 2  r 2  dB
 i
 a   2r  dB
2

  2r  dt 4  dt
m dB
  .
4d dt

51. (c)
Flux linked with the loop, when it is at a distance r from the wire is
 I
  BA cos 0   0  a 2
 2r 
 
2
 Ia d  Ia 2 d 1
  0
2r
Since   
dt
  0
2 dt
r  
0 Ia 2  dr   0Ia 2   dr 
  2  dt 
    2  
v   v 
2r    2r   dt 

52. (c)
R
Power factor is cos   , where
Z
2
Z2   X L  X C   R 2
2 2 2 2
 Z  100  20    40  20   Z2   80    60 

 Z  100  So, cos  

 40  20   0.6
100

53. (c) vt
vt
 B  dA  3
I    3
R R  dt 
vt N M
DN  CM  D C
3 VT
At time t , area of the triangle APQ, as a function of t is PX
Q X
X X X X

X X X X X X

X X X X X X
A
Ar  APQ   Ar  ACD   Ar of Trap  PQDC 
1 2vt  v2 t 2
 A  3a 2   2a  2a    vt   A  3a 2  2avt 
2 3 3

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 210
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

dA 2v 2 t B 2v2 t  2VB  vt 
 2av   I  2av    I  a 
dt 3 R 3  R  3
2Bva  2Bv2 
 I 
 3R 
t Which happens to be a straight line with negative slope. So, the I  t
R  
graph is best represented by  C  .

54. (d)
The equivalent circuit for this set up is
I

  Blv
6 3
2


F  BI  B   
R
 Bv  B2 2 v
 F  B   , (opposite to v)
 R  R
2 2
where R
 6  3  2  4   F
 2  2 4
 32 N
63 2

55. (a)

Leq 
 5.5 5  2.619 H
5.5  5

56. (d)
Since   Bv
So, if Q is the charge across the capacitor, then current in the branch containing the capacitor is
dQ
I , where Q  C   BCv
dt
 dv 
 I  BC  
 dt 
dv
Since 0 {  v  constant} So, I  0
dt

57. (c)

x
10 2 (for steady voltage)
R
x E2
 (for alternating voltage)
2 2R
 E  10 V

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 211
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

58. (a)
For ac of rms value 10 A
Pac  I2v R ……(1)
For dc of value 1
Pdc  I 2R …..(2)
Equating (1) and (2), we get
I  Iv  10A

59. (b)
dI
EL  IR
dt
 E    IR   ER
So, the graph of  vs I is a straight line with negative slope.

60. (d)
Since, the motional emf,  , is
  B v
    2  0.5 4   4 V
Since Q  C 
 Q   4  5  20 C
The equivalent circuit for the arrangement is
x x x X x x

x1 x x x x 1
v C   B v
2 2
x x x x x

x x x Y x x
So, q1  20 C and q2  20 C

61. (c)
E
I0  Peak value 
2R
1 2
Total heat produced across R is H  LI 0
2
1 E2
H  2L  2
2 4R
LE 2
 H
4R 2

62. (c)
I0
I at t  t 0


CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 212
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Since , I  I0 e t 0 

1
  e t 0     et 0 
 t 0   loge 

t
  0
log e 

63. (d)
  
For emit to be induced , v and B can never be coplanar.

64. (a)
Let the field be E at a distance x from the centre of the disc Then
eE  mx2
 m2 
E x
 e 
 
a a
m2 m2a 2
Since V   Edx   x dx 
0
e 0
2e
65. (a)
  R eq Ceq    51   5s

66. (b)
Vrms
I rms 
1
R2  2 2
C 
when  increases , Irms increases so the bulb glows brighter.

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. (a,d)
cos 30 sin 30
a , b C 1
cos 60 sin 60
abc  1 ab  c  1

2. (a,c)
d dB
E.M.F.  A  r 2
dt dt
p.d. b  diametrically opposite ends
 R 
V    ir     
R 2 2

3. (a,b,c,d)
L.C.R. circuit
XC  20 , R  10 , X L  10
X C  X 2 current leads voltage

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 213
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

xC

Z
20  10

10  R
xL

v rms 400 / 2
b rms  
2 10 2
10
cos    1/ 2
10 2
Vrms across R  20 10
 200 
4. (a,b,c,d)
E  BlvT 
At terminal speed Fext = Findnced ;   Bl    Bl
R  R 
E
  vT also inet = zero
BL
mdv E  Blv 
at time t ;  Bl   
dt R  R 
dv  B 2l 2 v EBl dv B 2l 2 BlE
   ;  v
dt mR mR dt mR mR

5. (a,b,d)
Restoring torque    MBsin 
 I 
 
    r 2 I2  0 1  
 2R 
 for small ,sin   
1    I I r 2    I I 
  mr 2      0 1 2       0 1 2   0
2   2R   mR 
 
..
Comparing with standard equation of SHM i.e,  2   0 , we get
0 I1I2

mR
mR 1
 T  2  T ,T  m, T  R
 0I1I2 I1I2
and is independent of r. so, (A), (B) and (D) are correct

6. (a,b,c,d)

7. (b,c)
 
vB
Therefore path f the particle is a circle. In magnetic field speed of particle remains constant.
 v 0
Therefore , distance moved by the particle in time t  is v0 t or
B0 B 0

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 214
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

 °
v 0 sin 60
v0

60
 °
v 0 cos 60
ˆ
v0i
2m 2
Since T  
qB0 B0
 T   v
 t
3B0 6
   
 v  v0 cos 60 ˆi  sin 60 ˆj   
 v  0 i  3 ˆj
2

Please note that since the magnitude of velocity remains same in the magnetic field. This is true but
will not help us to conclude whether (d) is correct or false.

8. (b,c,d)
   

Since, F  q E  v  B 
So for the proton to suffer deflection along  x axis, the force acting on it must be along  x axis.
For that to

happen, we must/

may have
Case I: E along x  axis ( B isswitched off) 
  
Case II: v along  y axis and B along z axis, so that v  B is along  x axis ( E switched off)
    
Case III: E along x  axis, B along  y axis v   v y ˆj  v z kˆ v  B is along  x axis
 
Case IV: E along  x axis B along  y axis
  
v   v ˆj  v kˆ
y 2 v  B is along  x axis

9. (a,c)
To find the Ampere force on a conductor of any shape just replaced the conductor by an imaginary
straight conductor joining the two ends of the given conductor having effective length  eff   .

10. (a,b,c)

11. (b,d) y
The velocity of proton makes an angle of 45 with the direction of magnetic
field. Therefore, path of the proton is a helix. The plane of the circle of this
helix is the plane formed by negative x and positive formed by negative x x
and positive z  axis. Therefore, x  coordinate can never be positive.
Further , x and z co-ordinates will become zero simultaneously after every
pitch and y  coordinate of proton at any time t is
y  v0 t  yt

12. (b,c,d)
13. (a,b,c)
 
When    then v B
 
 F0
So option (a) is correct

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 215
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

ˆi ˆj kˆ
  
 
Since, F q v  B  q   0
  0


 F  q  2  2 kˆ 


 F  2  2 
So OPTION is also correct
Also, from (1) , we get OPTION (C) to the correct.

14. (a,d)
Consider only one plate as shown in figure. The field on both sides of plate is shown in figure
The field on both sides of plate is shown in figure. Applying Ampere’s Circuital Law to the contour
C, we get L
B

B
C
0 j
2BL  0  jL  B
2
Superimposing , the field due to two plates we get at P both fields cancel each other and at Q, they
add to give BQ  0 j

15. (a,b)
1
Q 
R
i  NBA cos 0  NBA  2NB 2
Qf  NBA cos   2NB 2 cos 
2NB 2
R  2  2     6 Q 1  cos 
6
NB 2NB NB
For   90 , Q  For   180 , Q  For   270 , Q 
3 3 3
NB
For   360 , Q 
3
l l
16. (a,c,d) 2 2
By Law of Conservation of Energy 
 Loss inGravitational   Gain in Roational 

 Potential Energy    Kinetic Energy  l
    sin 
2
  1
 mg  sin    I2
2  2

   1  m  2
 mg      
 2  2  3 
3g sin 
 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 216
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

Further
1
  B 2
2
1 3
B 3g sin  2 1
      B 3g  sin   2  2  B
2  2
   sin     3 2

17. (a,c)
  d
   E.d   
dt
Inside  r  R 
d 1 dB
 E  2r   
dt

Br 2  E r
2 dt
Outside  r  R 
dB 1 R 2 dB
E  2r   R 2  E
dt 2 r dt

18. (b,c,d)
Using Fleming’s Right Hand Rule, we get
1 2 9
1  V0  Vp  B  3   B 2
2 2
ξ 1 ξ2
P Q
O
1 2 25
B   5  
 2  V0  V0  B  2
2 2
 2  1  V0  V0  V0  Vp   2  1  Vp  VQ  8B 2

19. (c,d)
Since VLL  VC  
V  VL2  VR2  VR
V VR 200
So, I     2A
R R 100

20. (a,d)
dI dI
L1 1  L 2 2
dt dt
 11 L I  L 2 I2
I L
 1  2 ……(1)
I2 L1
Steady state current passing through the resistor is
E
I  I1  I 2 
R
L  E EL 2 EL1
 I1   1  I1   I1  and I2 
 L2  R R  L1  L 2  R  L1  L 2 

CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 217
 FINAL LAP (MODULE – II) Rg. 2018 - 2020

21. (a,b,c,d)
dB
A
dt
 
 a 2  2     2a 2

dq  2a 2 2 a 2 a a 6a 2

Since I      Q  It     3  
dt R R   2 a    R
2
2  a2   2a 2  4 2 a 4
P  I R   2 R    R
   R  R
   
So, all the OPTIONS A,B,C and D are correct

22. (a,d)
1
f
2 LC
1
 F1  F2  F3  t1  t 2  t 3  f1  f 2  f3 
2 LC
Also, we have, from Law of Conservation of Energy
1 2 1
LI max  CV 2
2 2
C C1 C
 Imax  V 
L L1 L
C2 1 C C3 C
 and 2  I2  I1  I3
L2 2 L L3 L

23. (a,d)
When I increases, field associated with P increases. So Q lies in a field that increases or we can say
that apparently Q moves closer to P. hence P and Q must repel each other. Similarly I decreases ,
then O attracts Q.

24. (a,b,d)

25. (a,c,d)
1 2 1 C
LI max  CV02  Imax  V0
2 2 L
Also, we know that for this series LC circuit,
q  q0 cos  t  and V  V0 cos  t   q  CV
2 1
where   
T LC

So, potential across the capacitor becomes zero when  t 
2
 2   T 2 LC 
  t   t   LC
 T  2 4 4 2

Since at this moment t  LC , energy across the capacitor is zero, so energy across the inductor is
2
1 1
maximum and has a value LI 2max  CV02
2 2
CENTERS: MUMBAI /DELHI /AKOLA /LUCKNOW /NASHIK /PUNE /NAGPUR /BOKARO /DUBAI # 218